Commit | Line | Data |
---|---|---|
252b5132 | 1 | \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*- |
f7e42eb4 NC |
2 | @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, |
3 | @c 2001 | |
252b5132 RH |
4 | @c Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
5 | @c UPDATE!! On future updates-- | |
6 | @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in | |
7 | @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c | |
8 | @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op | |
9 | @c in config/tc-*.c | |
10 | @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op | |
11 | @c in config/obj-*.c | |
12 | @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c | |
13 | @c %**start of header | |
14 | @setfilename as.info | |
15 | @c ---config--- | |
a4fb0134 SC |
16 | @macro gcctabopt{body} |
17 | @code{\body\} | |
18 | @end macro | |
252b5132 RH |
19 | @c defaults, config file may override: |
20 | @set have-stabs | |
21 | @c --- | |
22 | @include asconfig.texi | |
23 | @include gasver.texi | |
24 | @c --- | |
0285c67d NC |
25 | @c man begin NAME |
26 | @ifset man | |
27 | @c Configure for the generation of man pages | |
28 | @set AS as | |
29 | @set TARGET TARGET | |
30 | @set GENERIC | |
31 | @set A29K | |
32 | @set ARC | |
33 | @set ARM | |
34 | @set D10V | |
35 | @set D30V | |
36 | @set H8/300 | |
37 | @set H8/500 | |
38 | @set HPPA | |
39 | @set I370 | |
40 | @set I80386 | |
41 | @set I860 | |
42 | @set I960 | |
43 | @set M32R | |
44 | @set M68HC11 | |
45 | @set M680X0 | |
81b0b3f1 | 46 | @set M880X0 |
0285c67d NC |
47 | @set MCORE |
48 | @set MIPS | |
3c3bdf30 | 49 | @set MMIX |
0285c67d NC |
50 | @set PDP11 |
51 | @set PJ | |
418c1742 | 52 | @set PPC |
0285c67d NC |
53 | @set SH |
54 | @set SPARC | |
55 | @set C54X | |
56 | @set V850 | |
57 | @set VAX | |
58 | @end ifset | |
59 | @c man end | |
252b5132 RH |
60 | @c common OR combinations of conditions |
61 | @ifset AOUT | |
62 | @set aout-bout | |
63 | @end ifset | |
64 | @ifset ARM/Thumb | |
65 | @set ARM | |
66 | @end ifset | |
67 | @ifset BOUT | |
68 | @set aout-bout | |
69 | @end ifset | |
70 | @ifset H8/300 | |
71 | @set H8 | |
72 | @end ifset | |
73 | @ifset H8/500 | |
74 | @set H8 | |
75 | @end ifset | |
76 | @ifset SH | |
77 | @set H8 | |
78 | @end ifset | |
79 | @ifset HPPA | |
80 | @set abnormal-separator | |
81 | @end ifset | |
82 | @c ------------ | |
83 | @ifset GENERIC | |
84 | @settitle Using @value{AS} | |
85 | @end ifset | |
86 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
87 | @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET}) | |
88 | @end ifclear | |
89 | @setchapternewpage odd | |
90 | @c %**end of header | |
91 | ||
92 | @c @smallbook | |
93 | @c @set SMALL | |
94 | @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine | |
95 | @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly. | |
96 | @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so | |
97 | @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections. | |
98 | @c | |
99 | @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables, | |
100 | @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on. | |
101 | @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page | |
102 | @c break. | |
103 | @c | |
104 | @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook, | |
105 | @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you | |
106 | @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the | |
107 | @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your | |
108 | @c discretion, of course. | |
109 | @ifinfo | |
110 | @set SMALL | |
111 | @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook, | |
112 | @c might as well show 'em anyways. | |
113 | @end ifinfo | |
114 | ||
115 | @ifinfo | |
116 | @format | |
117 | START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY | |
118 | * As: (as). The GNU assembler. | |
119 | END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY | |
120 | @end format | |
121 | @end ifinfo | |
122 | ||
123 | @finalout | |
124 | @syncodeindex ky cp | |
125 | ||
126 | @ifinfo | |
127 | This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}". | |
128 | ||
0285c67d | 129 | @c man begin COPYRIGHT |
a349d9dd | 130 | Copyright (C) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
252b5132 | 131 | |
0285c67d NC |
132 | Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document |
133 | under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 | |
134 | or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; | |
135 | with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no | |
136 | Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the | |
137 | section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License". | |
138 | ||
139 | @c man end | |
252b5132 RH |
140 | |
141 | @ignore | |
142 | Permission is granted to process this file through Tex and print the | |
143 | results, provided the printed document carries copying permission | |
144 | notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph | |
145 | (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual). | |
146 | ||
147 | @end ignore | |
252b5132 RH |
148 | @end ifinfo |
149 | ||
150 | @titlepage | |
151 | @title Using @value{AS} | |
152 | @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler | |
153 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
154 | @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family | |
155 | @end ifclear | |
156 | @sp 1 | |
157 | @subtitle Version @value{VERSION} | |
158 | @sp 1 | |
159 | @sp 13 | |
160 | The Free Software Foundation Inc. thanks The Nice Computer | |
161 | Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the | |
a4fb0134 | 162 | first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}. |
252b5132 RH |
163 | The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for |
164 | distracting the boss while they got some work | |
165 | done. | |
166 | @sp 3 | |
167 | @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends | |
168 | @page | |
169 | @tex | |
170 | {\parskip=0pt | |
171 | \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par | |
172 | \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par | |
173 | } | |
174 | %"boxit" macro for figures: | |
175 | %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3) | |
176 | \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt | |
177 | \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil | |
178 | #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline | |
179 | \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box | |
180 | @end tex | |
181 | ||
182 | @vskip 0pt plus 1filll | |
a349d9dd | 183 | Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
252b5132 | 184 | |
cf055d54 NC |
185 | Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document |
186 | under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 | |
187 | or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; | |
188 | with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no | |
189 | Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the | |
190 | section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License". | |
252b5132 | 191 | |
252b5132 RH |
192 | @end titlepage |
193 | ||
194 | @ifinfo | |
195 | @node Top | |
196 | @top Using @value{AS} | |
197 | ||
a4fb0134 | 198 | This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}} version |
252b5132 RH |
199 | @value{VERSION}. |
200 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
a4fb0134 | 201 | This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate |
252b5132 RH |
202 | code for @value{TARGET} architectures. |
203 | @end ifclear | |
cf055d54 NC |
204 | |
205 | This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free | |
206 | Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the | |
207 | section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License". | |
208 | ||
252b5132 RH |
209 | @menu |
210 | * Overview:: Overview | |
211 | * Invoking:: Command-Line Options | |
212 | * Syntax:: Syntax | |
213 | * Sections:: Sections and Relocation | |
214 | * Symbols:: Symbols | |
215 | * Expressions:: Expressions | |
216 | * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives | |
217 | * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features | |
218 | * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs | |
219 | * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What | |
cf055d54 | 220 | * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License |
252b5132 RH |
221 | * Index:: Index |
222 | @end menu | |
223 | @end ifinfo | |
224 | ||
225 | @node Overview | |
226 | @chapter Overview | |
227 | @iftex | |
a4fb0134 | 228 | This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}. |
252b5132 | 229 | @ifclear GENERIC |
a4fb0134 | 230 | This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate |
252b5132 RH |
231 | code for @value{TARGET} architectures. |
232 | @end ifclear | |
233 | @end iftex | |
234 | ||
235 | @cindex invocation summary | |
236 | @cindex option summary | |
237 | @cindex summary of options | |
a4fb0134 | 238 | Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details, |
252b5132 RH |
239 | @pxref{Invoking,,Comand-Line Options}. |
240 | ||
0285c67d NC |
241 | @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler. |
242 | ||
a4fb0134 | 243 | @ignore |
0285c67d NC |
244 | @c man begin SEEALSO |
245 | gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}. | |
246 | @c man end | |
a4fb0134 | 247 | @end ignore |
0285c67d | 248 | |
252b5132 RH |
249 | @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem |
250 | @c to be limited to one line for the header. | |
251 | @smallexample | |
0285c67d | 252 | @c man begin SYNOPSIS |
a4fb0134 SC |
253 | @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdhlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{-D}] [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] |
254 | [@b{-f}] [@b{--gstabs}] [@b{--gdwarf2}] [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] | |
255 | [@b{-J}] [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] | |
256 | [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] | |
257 | [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] | |
258 | [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--statistics}] [@b{-v}] | |
259 | [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] | |
260 | [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}] | |
261 | [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}] | |
262 | @c | |
263 | @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted. | |
264 | @c Add an empty line for separation. | |
252b5132 RH |
265 | @ifset A29K |
266 | @c am29k has no machine-dependent assembler options | |
267 | @end ifset | |
268 | @ifset ARC | |
a4fb0134 SC |
269 | |
270 | @emph{Target ARC options:} | |
271 | [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}] | |
272 | [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}] | |
252b5132 RH |
273 | @end ifset |
274 | @ifset ARM | |
a4fb0134 SC |
275 | |
276 | @emph{Target ARM options:} | |
03b1477f | 277 | @c Don't document the deprecated options |
92081f48 HPN |
278 | [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]] |
279 | [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]] | |
03b1477f RE |
280 | [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-fromat}] |
281 | [@b{-mthumb}] | |
a4fb0134 SC |
282 | [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}] |
283 | [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}| | |
284 | @b{-mapcs-reentrant}] | |
285 | [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-moabi}] [@b{-k}] | |
252b5132 RH |
286 | @end ifset |
287 | @ifset D10V | |
a4fb0134 SC |
288 | |
289 | @emph{Target D10V options:} | |
290 | [@b{-O}] | |
252b5132 RH |
291 | @end ifset |
292 | @ifset D30V | |
a4fb0134 SC |
293 | |
294 | @emph{Target D30V options:} | |
295 | [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}] | |
252b5132 RH |
296 | @end ifset |
297 | @ifset H8 | |
298 | @c Hitachi family chips have no machine-dependent assembler options | |
299 | @end ifset | |
300 | @ifset HPPA | |
301 | @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet). | |
302 | @end ifset | |
a4fb0134 SC |
303 | @ifset I80386 |
304 | ||
305 | @emph{Target i386 options:} | |
306 | [@b{--32}|@b{--64}] | |
252b5132 RH |
307 | @end ifset |
308 | @ifset I960 | |
a4fb0134 SC |
309 | |
310 | @emph{Target i960 options:} | |
252b5132 | 311 | @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c |
a4fb0134 SC |
312 | [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}| |
313 | @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}] | |
314 | [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}] | |
252b5132 | 315 | @end ifset |
ec694b89 | 316 | @ifset M32R |
a4fb0134 SC |
317 | |
318 | @emph{Target M32R options:} | |
319 | [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}| | |
320 | @b{--W[n]p}] | |
ec694b89 | 321 | @end ifset |
252b5132 | 322 | @ifset M680X0 |
a4fb0134 SC |
323 | |
324 | @emph{Target M680X0 options:} | |
325 | [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}] | |
252b5132 | 326 | @end ifset |
60bcf0fa | 327 | @ifset M68HC11 |
a4fb0134 SC |
328 | |
329 | @emph{Target M68HC11 options:} | |
330 | [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}] | |
331 | [@b{--force-long-branchs}] [@b{--short-branchs}] | |
332 | [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}] | |
333 | [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}] | |
334 | @end ifset | |
335 | @ifset MCORE | |
336 | ||
337 | @emph{Target MCORE options:} | |
338 | [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}] | |
339 | [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}] | |
60bcf0fa | 340 | @end ifset |
252b5132 | 341 | @ifset MIPS |
a4fb0134 SC |
342 | |
343 | @emph{Target MIPS options:} | |
344 | [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-mcpu}=@var{CPU} ] | |
345 | [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}] [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] | |
346 | [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips64}] | |
347 | [@b{-m4650}] [@b{-no-m4650}] | |
348 | [@b{--trap}] [@b{--break}] [@b{-n}] | |
349 | [@b{--emulation}=@var{name} ] | |
3c3bdf30 NC |
350 | @end ifset |
351 | @ifset MMIX | |
a4fb0134 SC |
352 | |
353 | @emph{Target MMIX options:} | |
354 | [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}] | |
355 | [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}] | |
356 | [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}] | |
357 | @end ifset | |
358 | @ifset PDP11 | |
359 | ||
360 | @emph{Target PDP11 options:} | |
361 | [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}] | |
362 | [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}] | |
363 | [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}] | |
364 | @end ifset | |
365 | @ifset PJ | |
366 | ||
367 | @emph{Target picoJava options:} | |
368 | [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}] | |
369 | @end ifset | |
370 | @ifset PPC | |
371 | ||
372 | @emph{Target PowerPC options:} | |
373 | [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}| | |
374 | @b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|@b{-mppc64}|@b{-m620}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|@b{-mbooke}| | |
375 | @b{-mbooke32}|@b{-mbooke64}] | |
376 | [@b{-mcom}|@b{-many}|@b{-maltivec}] [@b{-memb}] | |
377 | [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}] | |
378 | [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}] | |
379 | [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}] | |
380 | [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}] | |
381 | @end ifset | |
382 | @ifset SPARC | |
383 | ||
384 | @emph{Target SPARC options:} | |
385 | @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi. | |
386 | [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite} | |
387 | @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}] | |
388 | [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}] | |
389 | [@b{-32}|@b{-64}] | |
390 | @end ifset | |
391 | @ifset TIC54X | |
392 | ||
393 | @emph{Target TIC54X options:} | |
394 | [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}] | |
395 | [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}] | |
396 | @end ifset | |
397 | @ifset Z8000 | |
398 | @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options | |
252b5132 | 399 | @end ifset |
0285c67d | 400 | @c man end |
252b5132 RH |
401 | @end smallexample |
402 | ||
0285c67d NC |
403 | @c man begin OPTIONS |
404 | ||
a4fb0134 | 405 | @table @gcctabopt |
252b5132 RH |
406 | @item -a[cdhlmns] |
407 | Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways: | |
408 | ||
a4fb0134 | 409 | @table @gcctabopt |
252b5132 RH |
410 | @item -ac |
411 | omit false conditionals | |
412 | ||
413 | @item -ad | |
414 | omit debugging directives | |
415 | ||
416 | @item -ah | |
417 | include high-level source | |
418 | ||
419 | @item -al | |
420 | include assembly | |
421 | ||
422 | @item -am | |
423 | include macro expansions | |
424 | ||
425 | @item -an | |
426 | omit forms processing | |
427 | ||
428 | @item -as | |
429 | include symbols | |
430 | ||
431 | @item =file | |
432 | set the name of the listing file | |
433 | @end table | |
434 | ||
435 | You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly | |
436 | listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be | |
437 | the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}. | |
438 | ||
439 | @item -D | |
440 | Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to | |
441 | other assemblers. | |
442 | ||
443 | @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value} | |
444 | Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file. | |
445 | @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x} | |
446 | indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal value. | |
447 | ||
448 | @item -f | |
449 | ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is | |
450 | compiler output). | |
451 | ||
452 | @item --gstabs | |
453 | Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This | |
454 | may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. | |
455 | ||
cdf82bcf NC |
456 | @item --gdwarf2 |
457 | Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This | |
85a39694 NC |
458 | may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note - this |
459 | option is only supported by some targets, not all of them. | |
cdf82bcf | 460 | |
252b5132 RH |
461 | @item --help |
462 | Print a summary of the command line options and exit. | |
463 | ||
ea20a7da CC |
464 | @item --target-help |
465 | Print a summary of all target specific options and exit. | |
466 | ||
252b5132 RH |
467 | @item -I @var{dir} |
468 | Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives. | |
469 | ||
470 | @item -J | |
471 | Don't warn about signed overflow. | |
472 | ||
473 | @item -K | |
474 | @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE | |
475 | This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family. | |
476 | @end ifclear | |
477 | @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE | |
478 | Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements. | |
479 | @end ifset | |
480 | ||
481 | @item -L | |
482 | @itemx --keep-locals | |
483 | Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. On traditional a.out systems | |
484 | these start with @samp{L}, but different systems have different local | |
485 | label prefixes. | |
486 | ||
c3a27914 NC |
487 | @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number} |
488 | Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler | |
489 | listing to @var{number}. | |
490 | ||
491 | @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number} | |
492 | Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation | |
493 | lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}. | |
494 | ||
495 | @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number} | |
496 | Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to | |
497 | @var{number} bytes. | |
498 | ||
499 | @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number} | |
500 | Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input | |
501 | to @var{number} + 1. | |
502 | ||
252b5132 | 503 | @item -o @var{objfile} |
a4fb0134 | 504 | Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}. |
252b5132 RH |
505 | |
506 | @item -R | |
507 | Fold the data section into the text section. | |
508 | ||
509 | @item --statistics | |
510 | Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by | |
511 | assembly. | |
512 | ||
513 | @item --strip-local-absolute | |
514 | Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table. | |
515 | ||
516 | @item -v | |
517 | @itemx -version | |
a4fb0134 | 518 | Print the @command{as} version. |
252b5132 RH |
519 | |
520 | @item --version | |
a4fb0134 | 521 | Print the @command{as} version and exit. |
252b5132 RH |
522 | |
523 | @item -W | |
2bdd6cf5 | 524 | @itemx --no-warn |
252b5132 RH |
525 | Suppress warning messages. |
526 | ||
2bdd6cf5 GK |
527 | @item --fatal-warnings |
528 | Treat warnings as errors. | |
529 | ||
530 | @item --warn | |
531 | Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors. | |
532 | ||
252b5132 RH |
533 | @item -w |
534 | Ignored. | |
535 | ||
536 | @item -x | |
537 | Ignored. | |
538 | ||
539 | @item -Z | |
540 | Generate an object file even after errors. | |
541 | ||
542 | @item -- | @var{files} @dots{} | |
543 | Standard input, or source files to assemble. | |
544 | ||
545 | @end table | |
546 | ||
547 | @ifset ARC | |
548 | The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for | |
549 | an ARC processor. | |
550 | ||
a4fb0134 | 551 | @table @gcctabopt |
0d2bcfaf NC |
552 | @item -marc[5|6|7|8] |
553 | This option selects the core processor variant. | |
554 | @item -EB | -EL | |
555 | Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output. | |
252b5132 RH |
556 | @end table |
557 | @end ifset | |
558 | ||
559 | @ifset ARM | |
560 | The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM | |
561 | processor family. | |
562 | ||
a4fb0134 | 563 | @table @gcctabopt |
92081f48 | 564 | @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}] |
cdf82bcf | 565 | Specify which ARM processor variant is the target. |
92081f48 | 566 | @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}] |
cdf82bcf | 567 | Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target. |
03b1477f | 568 | @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format} |
a349d9dd | 569 | Select which Floating Point architecture is the target. |
03b1477f RE |
570 | @item -mthumb |
571 | Enable Thumb only instruction decoding. | |
cdf82bcf | 572 | @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant | -moabi |
252b5132 RH |
573 | Select which procedure calling convention is in use. |
574 | @item -EB | -EL | |
575 | Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output. | |
cdf82bcf NC |
576 | @item -mthumb-interwork |
577 | Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and | |
578 | ARM code in mind. | |
579 | @item -k | |
580 | Specify that PIC code has been generated. | |
252b5132 RH |
581 | @end table |
582 | @end ifset | |
583 | ||
584 | @ifset D10V | |
585 | The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for | |
586 | a D10V processor. | |
a4fb0134 | 587 | @table @gcctabopt |
252b5132 RH |
588 | @cindex D10V optimization |
589 | @cindex optimization, D10V | |
590 | @item -O | |
591 | Optimize output by parallelizing instructions. | |
592 | @end table | |
593 | @end ifset | |
594 | ||
595 | @ifset D30V | |
596 | The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V | |
597 | processor. | |
a4fb0134 | 598 | @table @gcctabopt |
252b5132 RH |
599 | @cindex D30V optimization |
600 | @cindex optimization, D30V | |
601 | @item -O | |
602 | Optimize output by parallelizing instructions. | |
603 | ||
604 | @cindex D30V nops | |
605 | @item -n | |
606 | Warn when nops are generated. | |
607 | ||
608 | @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply | |
609 | @item -N | |
610 | Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated. | |
611 | @end table | |
612 | @end ifset | |
613 | ||
614 | @ifset I960 | |
615 | The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the | |
616 | Intel 80960 processor. | |
617 | ||
a4fb0134 | 618 | @table @gcctabopt |
252b5132 RH |
619 | @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC |
620 | Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target. | |
621 | ||
622 | @item -b | |
623 | Add code to collect statistics about branches taken. | |
624 | ||
625 | @item -no-relax | |
626 | Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements; | |
627 | error if necessary. | |
628 | ||
629 | @end table | |
630 | @end ifset | |
631 | ||
ec694b89 NC |
632 | @ifset M32R |
633 | The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the | |
634 | Mitsubishi M32R series. | |
635 | ||
a4fb0134 | 636 | @table @gcctabopt |
ec694b89 NC |
637 | |
638 | @item --m32rx | |
639 | Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default | |
640 | is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX. | |
641 | ||
642 | @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp | |
643 | Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are | |
644 | encountered. | |
645 | ||
646 | @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp | |
647 | Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are | |
648 | encountered. | |
649 | ||
650 | @end table | |
651 | @end ifset | |
252b5132 RH |
652 | |
653 | @ifset M680X0 | |
654 | The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the | |
655 | Motorola 68000 series. | |
656 | ||
a4fb0134 | 657 | @table @gcctabopt |
252b5132 RH |
658 | |
659 | @item -l | |
660 | Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two. | |
661 | ||
0285c67d NC |
662 | @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030 |
663 | @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332 | |
664 | @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200 | |
252b5132 RH |
665 | Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default |
666 | is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time. | |
667 | ||
668 | @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882 | |
669 | The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor. | |
670 | The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although | |
671 | the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the | |
672 | two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the | |
673 | coprocessor instructions with the main processor. | |
674 | ||
675 | @item -m68851 | -mno-68851 | |
676 | The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management | |
677 | unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up. | |
678 | ||
679 | @end table | |
680 | @end ifset | |
681 | ||
e135f41b NC |
682 | @ifset PDP11 |
683 | ||
684 | For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options, | |
685 | see @ref{PDP-11-Options}. | |
686 | ||
a4fb0134 | 687 | @table @gcctabopt |
e135f41b NC |
688 | @item -mpic | -mno-pic |
689 | Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The | |
a4fb0134 | 690 | default is @option{-mpic}. |
e135f41b NC |
691 | |
692 | @item -mall | |
693 | @itemx -mall-extensions | |
694 | Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default. | |
695 | ||
696 | @item -mno-extensions | |
697 | Disable all instruction set extensions. | |
698 | ||
699 | @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension} | |
700 | Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension. | |
701 | ||
702 | @item -m@var{cpu} | |
703 | Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and | |
704 | disable all other extensions. | |
705 | ||
706 | @item -m@var{machine} | |
707 | Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine | |
708 | model, and disable all other extensions. | |
709 | @end table | |
710 | ||
711 | @end ifset | |
712 | ||
041dd5a9 ILT |
713 | @ifset PJ |
714 | The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for | |
715 | a picoJava processor. | |
716 | ||
a4fb0134 | 717 | @table @gcctabopt |
041dd5a9 ILT |
718 | |
719 | @cindex PJ endianness | |
720 | @cindex endianness, PJ | |
721 | @cindex big endian output, PJ | |
722 | @item -mb | |
723 | Generate ``big endian'' format output. | |
724 | ||
725 | @cindex little endian output, PJ | |
726 | @item -ml | |
727 | Generate ``little endian'' format output. | |
728 | ||
729 | @end table | |
730 | @end ifset | |
731 | ||
60bcf0fa NC |
732 | @ifset M68HC11 |
733 | The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the | |
734 | Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series. | |
735 | ||
a4fb0134 | 736 | @table @gcctabopt |
60bcf0fa NC |
737 | |
738 | @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | |
739 | Specify what processor is the target. The default is | |
740 | defined by the configuration option when building the assembler. | |
741 | ||
742 | @item --force-long-branchs | |
743 | Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns | |
744 | conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a | |
745 | sub routine. | |
746 | ||
747 | @item -S | --short-branchs | |
748 | Do not turn relative branchs into absolute ones | |
749 | when the offset is out of range. | |
750 | ||
751 | @item --strict-direct-mode | |
752 | Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode | |
753 | when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode. | |
754 | ||
755 | @item --print-insn-syntax | |
756 | Print the syntax of instruction in case of error. | |
757 | ||
758 | @item --print-opcodes | |
759 | print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit. | |
760 | ||
761 | @item --generate-example | |
762 | print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit. | |
a4fb0134 | 763 | This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}. |
60bcf0fa NC |
764 | |
765 | @end table | |
766 | @end ifset | |
767 | ||
252b5132 | 768 | @ifset SPARC |
a4fb0134 | 769 | The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured |
252b5132 RH |
770 | for the SPARC architecture: |
771 | ||
a4fb0134 | 772 | @table @gcctabopt |
252b5132 RH |
773 | @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite |
774 | @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a | |
775 | Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture. | |
776 | ||
777 | @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment. | |
778 | @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment. | |
779 | ||
780 | @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with | |
781 | UltraSPARC extensions. | |
782 | ||
783 | @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa | |
784 | For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are | |
785 | equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively. | |
786 | ||
787 | @item -bump | |
788 | Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture. | |
789 | @end table | |
790 | @end ifset | |
791 | ||
39bec121 TW |
792 | @ifset TIC54X |
793 | The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x | |
794 | architecture. | |
795 | ||
a4fb0134 | 796 | @table @gcctabopt |
39bec121 TW |
797 | @item -mfar-mode |
798 | Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume | |
799 | extended addressing (usually 23 bits). | |
800 | @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION} | |
801 | Sets the CPU version being compiled for. | |
802 | @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME} | |
803 | Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such | |
804 | behaviour in the shell. | |
805 | @end table | |
806 | @end ifset | |
807 | ||
252b5132 RH |
808 | @ifset MIPS |
809 | The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for | |
810 | a MIPS processor. | |
811 | ||
a4fb0134 | 812 | @table @gcctabopt |
252b5132 RH |
813 | @item -G @var{num} |
814 | This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced | |
815 | implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that | |
816 | use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8. | |
817 | ||
818 | @cindex MIPS endianness | |
819 | @cindex endianness, MIPS | |
820 | @cindex big endian output, MIPS | |
821 | @item -EB | |
822 | Generate ``big endian'' format output. | |
823 | ||
824 | @cindex little endian output, MIPS | |
825 | @item -EL | |
826 | Generate ``little endian'' format output. | |
827 | ||
828 | @cindex MIPS ISA | |
829 | @item -mips1 | |
830 | @itemx -mips2 | |
831 | @itemx -mips3 | |
e7af610e NC |
832 | @itemx -mips4 |
833 | @itemx -mips32 | |
4058e45f | 834 | @itemx -mips64 |
252b5132 RH |
835 | Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level. |
836 | @samp{-mips1} corresponds to the @sc{r2000} and @sc{r3000} processors, | |
84ea6cf2 NC |
837 | @samp{-mips2} to the @sc{r6000} processor, and @samp{-mips3} to the @sc{r4000} |
838 | processor. | |
839 | @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, and @samp{-mips64} correspond | |
840 | to generic @sc{MIPS V}, @sc{MIPS32}, and @sc{MIPS64} ISA | |
841 | processors, respectively. | |
252b5132 RH |
842 | |
843 | @item -m4650 | |
844 | @itemx -no-m4650 | |
845 | Generate code for the MIPS @sc{r4650} chip. This tells the assembler to accept | |
846 | the @samp{mad} and @samp{madu} instruction, and to not schedule @samp{nop} | |
847 | instructions around accesses to the @samp{HI} and @samp{LO} registers. | |
848 | @samp{-no-m4650} turns off this option. | |
849 | ||
850 | @item -mcpu=@var{CPU} | |
c6c98b38 NC |
851 | Generate code for a particular MIPS cpu. It is exactly equivalent to |
852 | @samp{-m@var{cpu}}, except that there are more value of @var{cpu} | |
853 | understood. | |
252b5132 RH |
854 | |
855 | @cindex emulation | |
856 | @item --emulation=@var{name} | |
a4fb0134 | 857 | This option causes @command{@value{AS}} to emulate @command{@value{AS}} configured |
252b5132 RH |
858 | for some other target, in all respects, including output format (choosing |
859 | between ELF and ECOFF only), handling of pseudo-opcodes which may generate | |
860 | debugging information or store symbol table information, and default | |
861 | endianness. The available configuration names are: @samp{mipsecoff}, | |
862 | @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslecoff}, @samp{mipsbecoff}, @samp{mipslelf}, | |
863 | @samp{mipsbelf}. The first two do not alter the default endianness from that | |
864 | of the primary target for which the assembler was configured; the others change | |
865 | the default to little- or big-endian as indicated by the @samp{b} or @samp{l} | |
866 | in the name. Using @samp{-EB} or @samp{-EL} will override the endianness | |
867 | selection in any case. | |
868 | ||
869 | This option is currently supported only when the primary target | |
a4fb0134 | 870 | @command{@value{AS}} is configured for is a MIPS ELF or ECOFF target. |
252b5132 RH |
871 | Furthermore, the primary target or others specified with |
872 | @samp{--enable-targets=@dots{}} at configuration time must include support for | |
873 | the other format, if both are to be available. For example, the Irix 5 | |
874 | configuration includes support for both. | |
875 | ||
876 | Eventually, this option will support more configurations, with more | |
877 | fine-grained control over the assembler's behavior, and will be supported for | |
878 | more processors. | |
879 | ||
880 | @item -nocpp | |
a4fb0134 | 881 | @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with |
252b5132 RH |
882 | the native tools. |
883 | ||
884 | @need 900 | |
885 | @item --trap | |
886 | @itemx --no-trap | |
887 | @itemx --break | |
888 | @itemx --no-break | |
889 | Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero. | |
890 | @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception | |
891 | (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher); | |
892 | @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a | |
893 | break exception. | |
63486801 L |
894 | |
895 | @item -n | |
a4fb0134 | 896 | When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every |
63486801 | 897 | time it generates a nop instruction from a macro. |
252b5132 RH |
898 | @end table |
899 | @end ifset | |
900 | ||
901 | @ifset MCORE | |
902 | The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for | |
903 | an MCore processor. | |
904 | ||
a4fb0134 | 905 | @table @gcctabopt |
252b5132 RH |
906 | @item -jsri2bsr |
907 | @itemx -nojsri2bsr | |
908 | Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled. | |
909 | The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it. | |
910 | ||
911 | @item -sifilter | |
912 | @itemx -nosifilter | |
913 | Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled. | |
a349d9dd | 914 | The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option. |
252b5132 RH |
915 | |
916 | @item -relax | |
917 | Alter jump instructions for long displacements. | |
918 | ||
ec694b89 NC |
919 | @item -mcpu=[210|340] |
920 | Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions | |
921 | can be assembled. | |
922 | ||
923 | @item -EB | |
924 | Assemble for a big endian target. | |
925 | ||
926 | @item -EL | |
927 | Assemble for a little endian target. | |
252b5132 RH |
928 | |
929 | @end table | |
930 | @end ifset | |
931 | ||
3c3bdf30 NC |
932 | @ifset MMIX |
933 | See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options. | |
934 | @end ifset | |
935 | ||
0285c67d NC |
936 | @c man end |
937 | ||
252b5132 RH |
938 | @menu |
939 | * Manual:: Structure of this Manual | |
940 | * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler | |
941 | * Object Formats:: Object File Formats | |
942 | * Command Line:: Command Line | |
943 | * Input Files:: Input Files | |
944 | * Object:: Output (Object) File | |
945 | * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages | |
946 | @end menu | |
947 | ||
948 | @node Manual | |
949 | @section Structure of this Manual | |
950 | ||
951 | @cindex manual, structure and purpose | |
952 | This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use | |
a4fb0134 | 953 | @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including |
252b5132 | 954 | notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that |
a4fb0134 | 955 | @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. |
252b5132 RH |
956 | |
957 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
958 | We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET} | |
a4fb0134 | 959 | configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives. |
252b5132 RH |
960 | @end ifclear |
961 | @ifset GENERIC | |
962 | This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of | |
963 | various flavors of the assembler. | |
964 | @end ifset | |
965 | ||
966 | @cindex machine instructions (not covered) | |
967 | On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction | |
968 | to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general! | |
969 | In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine | |
970 | architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard | |
971 | mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a | |
972 | particular architecture. | |
973 | @ifset GENERIC | |
974 | You may want to consult the manufacturer's | |
975 | machine architecture manual for this information. | |
976 | @end ifset | |
977 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
978 | @ifset H8/300 | |
979 | For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300 | |
980 | Series Programming Manual} (Hitachi ADE--602--025). For the H8/300H, | |
981 | see @cite{H8/300H Series Programming Manual} (Hitachi). | |
982 | @end ifset | |
983 | @ifset H8/500 | |
984 | For information on the H8/500 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/500 | |
985 | Series Programming Manual} (Hitachi M21T001). | |
986 | @end ifset | |
987 | @ifset SH | |
988 | For information on the Hitachi SH machine instruction set, see | |
989 | @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Hitachi Micro Systems, Inc.). | |
990 | @end ifset | |
991 | @ifset Z8000 | |
992 | For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual} | |
993 | @end ifset | |
994 | @end ifclear | |
995 | ||
996 | @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991 | |
997 | @ignore | |
998 | Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU}, | |
999 | the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software | |
1000 | Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of | |
1001 | computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on); | |
1002 | once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less | |
1003 | qualification. | |
1004 | ||
a4fb0134 | 1005 | @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level |
252b5132 RH |
1006 | human-readable series of instructions into a low-level |
1007 | computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of | |
a4fb0134 | 1008 | @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer. |
252b5132 RH |
1009 | @end ignore |
1010 | ||
1011 | @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined | |
1012 | @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any | |
1013 | @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16 | |
1014 | @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user | |
1015 | @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define. | |
1016 | @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual; | |
1017 | @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of | |
1018 | @c directives). | |
1019 | ||
1020 | @node GNU Assembler | |
1021 | @section The GNU Assembler | |
1022 | ||
0285c67d NC |
1023 | @c man begin DESCRIPTION |
1024 | ||
a4fb0134 | 1025 | @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers. |
252b5132 | 1026 | @ifclear GENERIC |
a4fb0134 | 1027 | This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is |
252b5132 RH |
1028 | configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures. |
1029 | @end ifclear | |
1030 | If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you | |
1031 | should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another | |
1032 | architecture. Each version has much in common with the others, | |
1033 | including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called | |
1034 | @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill | |
1035 | ||
1036 | @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler | |
a4fb0134 | 1037 | @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the |
252b5132 | 1038 | @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker |
a4fb0134 | 1039 | @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}} |
252b5132 RH |
1040 | assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same |
1041 | machine would assemble. | |
1042 | @ifset VAX | |
1043 | Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}). | |
1044 | @end ifset | |
1045 | @ifset M680X0 | |
1046 | @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption | |
1047 | @c here is that generic version sets M680x0. | |
a4fb0134 | 1048 | This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another |
252b5132 RH |
1049 | assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several |
1050 | incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax. | |
1051 | @end ifset | |
1052 | ||
0285c67d NC |
1053 | @c man end |
1054 | ||
a4fb0134 | 1055 | Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source |
252b5132 RH |
1056 | program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the |
1057 | @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}). | |
1058 | ||
1059 | @node Object Formats | |
1060 | @section Object File Formats | |
1061 | ||
1062 | @cindex object file format | |
1063 | The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative | |
1064 | object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you | |
1065 | write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols | |
1066 | are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol | |
1067 | Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}. | |
1068 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
1069 | @ifclear MULTI-OBJ | |
a4fb0134 | 1070 | On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce |
252b5132 RH |
1071 | @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files. |
1072 | @end ifclear | |
1073 | @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally | |
1074 | @ifset A29K | |
a4fb0134 | 1075 | On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either |
252b5132 RH |
1076 | @code{a.out} or COFF format object files. |
1077 | @end ifset | |
1078 | @ifset I960 | |
a4fb0134 | 1079 | On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either |
252b5132 RH |
1080 | @code{b.out} or COFF format object files. |
1081 | @end ifset | |
1082 | @ifset HPPA | |
a4fb0134 | 1083 | On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either |
252b5132 RH |
1084 | SOM or ELF format object files. |
1085 | @end ifset | |
1086 | @end ifclear | |
1087 | ||
1088 | @node Command Line | |
1089 | @section Command Line | |
1090 | ||
1091 | @cindex command line conventions | |
0285c67d | 1092 | |
a4fb0134 | 1093 | After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain |
252b5132 RH |
1094 | options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be |
1095 | before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is | |
1096 | significant. | |
1097 | ||
1098 | @cindex standard input, as input file | |
1099 | @kindex -- | |
1100 | @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file | |
a4fb0134 | 1101 | explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble. |
252b5132 RH |
1102 | |
1103 | @cindex options, command line | |
1104 | Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a | |
1105 | hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of | |
a4fb0134 | 1106 | @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An |
252b5132 RH |
1107 | option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of |
1108 | the letter is important. All options are optional. | |
1109 | ||
1110 | Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file | |
1111 | name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible | |
1112 | with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu} | |
1113 | standard). These two command lines are equivalent: | |
1114 | ||
1115 | @smallexample | |
1116 | @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s | |
1117 | @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s | |
1118 | @end smallexample | |
1119 | ||
1120 | @node Input Files | |
1121 | @section Input Files | |
1122 | ||
1123 | @cindex input | |
1124 | @cindex source program | |
1125 | @cindex files, input | |
1126 | We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to | |
a4fb0134 | 1127 | describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may |
252b5132 RH |
1128 | be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files |
1129 | doesn't change the meaning of the source. | |
1130 | ||
1131 | @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my | |
1132 | @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com | |
1133 | The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the | |
1134 | order specified. | |
1135 | ||
0285c67d | 1136 | @c man begin DESCRIPTION |
a4fb0134 | 1137 | Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source |
252b5132 RH |
1138 | program. The source program is made up of one or more files. |
1139 | (The standard input is also a file.) | |
1140 | ||
a4fb0134 | 1141 | You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file |
252b5132 RH |
1142 | names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A |
1143 | command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning | |
1144 | is taken to be an input file name. | |
1145 | ||
a4fb0134 SC |
1146 | If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file |
1147 | from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You | |
1148 | may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program | |
252b5132 RH |
1149 | to assemble. |
1150 | ||
1151 | Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file | |
1152 | in your command line. | |
1153 | ||
a4fb0134 | 1154 | If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object |
252b5132 RH |
1155 | file. |
1156 | ||
0285c67d NC |
1157 | @c man end |
1158 | ||
252b5132 RH |
1159 | @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers |
1160 | ||
1161 | @cindex input file linenumbers | |
1162 | @cindex line numbers, in input files | |
1163 | There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and | |
1164 | either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line | |
1165 | number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a | |
1166 | ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}. | |
1167 | ||
1168 | @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given | |
a4fb0134 | 1169 | to @command{@value{AS}}. |
252b5132 RH |
1170 | |
1171 | @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler | |
1172 | directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help | |
a4fb0134 SC |
1173 | error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source |
1174 | is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the | |
252b5132 RH |
1175 | @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also |
1176 | @ref{File,,@code{.file}}. | |
1177 | ||
1178 | @node Object | |
1179 | @section Output (Object) File | |
1180 | ||
1181 | @cindex object file | |
1182 | @cindex output file | |
1183 | @kindex a.out | |
1184 | @kindex .o | |
a4fb0134 | 1185 | Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is |
252b5132 RH |
1186 | your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file |
1187 | is the object file. Its default name is | |
1188 | @ifclear BOUT | |
1189 | @code{a.out}. | |
1190 | @end ifclear | |
1191 | @ifset BOUT | |
1192 | @ifset GENERIC | |
1193 | @code{a.out}, or | |
1194 | @end ifset | |
a4fb0134 | 1195 | @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960. |
252b5132 | 1196 | @end ifset |
a4fb0134 | 1197 | You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally, |
252b5132 RH |
1198 | object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical |
1199 | reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs | |
1200 | directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently | |
1201 | possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.) | |
1202 | ||
1203 | @cindex linker | |
1204 | @kindex ld | |
1205 | The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains | |
1206 | assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate | |
1207 | the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic | |
1208 | information for the debugger. | |
1209 | ||
1210 | @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out. | |
1211 | @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage. | |
1212 | ||
1213 | @node Errors | |
1214 | @section Error and Warning Messages | |
1215 | ||
0285c67d NC |
1216 | @c man begin DESCRIPTION |
1217 | ||
a349d9dd | 1218 | @cindex error messages |
252b5132 RH |
1219 | @cindex warning messages |
1220 | @cindex messages from assembler | |
a4fb0134 | 1221 | @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error |
252b5132 | 1222 | file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler |
a4fb0134 SC |
1223 | runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so |
1224 | that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a | |
252b5132 RH |
1225 | grave problem that stops the assembly. |
1226 | ||
0285c67d NC |
1227 | @c man end |
1228 | ||
252b5132 RH |
1229 | @cindex format of warning messages |
1230 | Warning messages have the format | |
1231 | ||
1232 | @smallexample | |
1233 | file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text | |
1234 | @end smallexample | |
1235 | ||
1236 | @noindent | |
1237 | @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors | |
1238 | (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given | |
1239 | (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of | |
1240 | the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given | |
1241 | @ifset GENERIC | |
1242 | (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}}) | |
1243 | @end ifset | |
1244 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
1245 | @ifclear A29K | |
1246 | (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}}) | |
1247 | @end ifclear | |
1248 | @ifset A29K | |
1249 | (@pxref{Ln,,@code{.ln}}) | |
1250 | @end ifset | |
1251 | @end ifclear | |
1252 | then it is used to calculate the number printed, | |
1253 | otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The | |
1254 | message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix | |
1255 | tradition). | |
1256 | ||
1257 | @cindex format of error messages | |
1258 | Error messages have the format | |
1259 | @smallexample | |
1260 | file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text | |
1261 | @end smallexample | |
1262 | The file name and line number are derived as for warning | |
1263 | messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory | |
1264 | because many of them aren't supposed to happen. | |
1265 | ||
1266 | @node Invoking | |
1267 | @chapter Command-Line Options | |
1268 | ||
1269 | @cindex options, all versions of assembler | |
1270 | This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all} | |
1271 | versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; @pxref{Machine Dependencies}, for options specific | |
1272 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
1273 | to the @value{TARGET}. | |
1274 | @end ifclear | |
1275 | @ifset GENERIC | |
1276 | to particular machine architectures. | |
1277 | @end ifset | |
1278 | ||
0285c67d NC |
1279 | @c man begin DESCRIPTION |
1280 | ||
a4fb0134 | 1281 | If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler (version 2), |
252b5132 RH |
1282 | you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler. |
1283 | The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa}) | |
1284 | by commas. For example: | |
1285 | ||
1286 | @smallexample | |
1287 | gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c | |
1288 | @end smallexample | |
1289 | ||
1290 | @noindent | |
1291 | This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to | |
1292 | standard output with with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain | |
1293 | local symbols in the symbol table). | |
1294 | ||
1295 | Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler | |
1296 | command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler. | |
1297 | (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see | |
1298 | precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the | |
1299 | assembler.) | |
1300 | ||
0285c67d NC |
1301 | @c man end |
1302 | ||
252b5132 RH |
1303 | @menu |
1304 | * a:: -a[cdhlns] enable listings | |
1305 | * D:: -D for compatibility | |
1306 | * f:: -f to work faster | |
1307 | * I:: -I for .include search path | |
1308 | @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE | |
1309 | * K:: -K for compatibility | |
1310 | @end ifclear | |
1311 | @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE | |
1312 | * K:: -K for difference tables | |
1313 | @end ifset | |
1314 | ||
1315 | * L:: -L to retain local labels | |
c3a27914 | 1316 | * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output |
252b5132 RH |
1317 | * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode |
1318 | * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking | |
1319 | * o:: -o to name the object file | |
1320 | * R:: -R to join data and text sections | |
1321 | * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly | |
1322 | * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output | |
1323 | * v:: -v to announce version | |
2bdd6cf5 | 1324 | * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings |
252b5132 RH |
1325 | * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors |
1326 | @end menu | |
1327 | ||
1328 | @node a | |
a4fb0134 | 1329 | @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdhlns]} |
252b5132 RH |
1330 | |
1331 | @kindex -a | |
1332 | @kindex -ac | |
1333 | @kindex -ad | |
1334 | @kindex -ah | |
1335 | @kindex -al | |
1336 | @kindex -an | |
1337 | @kindex -as | |
1338 | @cindex listings, enabling | |
1339 | @cindex assembly listings, enabling | |
1340 | ||
1341 | These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself, | |
1342 | @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing. | |
1343 | You can use other letters to select specific options for the list: | |
1344 | @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing, | |
1345 | @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and | |
1346 | @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing. | |
1347 | High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like | |
1348 | @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested | |
1349 | also. | |
1350 | ||
1351 | Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines | |
1352 | which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any | |
1353 | other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be | |
1354 | omitted from the listing. | |
1355 | ||
1356 | Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the | |
1357 | listing. | |
1358 | ||
1359 | Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control | |
1360 | listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list}, | |
1361 | @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and | |
1362 | @code{.sbttl}. | |
1363 | The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing. | |
1364 | If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the | |
1365 | listing-control directives have no effect. | |
1366 | ||
1367 | The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option, | |
1368 | @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}. | |
1369 | ||
c3a27914 NC |
1370 | Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (eg because it |
1371 | is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch | |
1372 | is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor | |
1373 | directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from | |
1374 | stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces | |
1375 | memory usage and makes the code more efficient. | |
1376 | ||
252b5132 | 1377 | @node D |
a4fb0134 | 1378 | @section @option{-D} |
252b5132 RH |
1379 | |
1380 | @kindex -D | |
1381 | This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more | |
1382 | likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with | |
a4fb0134 | 1383 | @command{@value{AS}}. |
252b5132 RH |
1384 | |
1385 | @node f | |
a4fb0134 | 1386 | @section Work Faster: @option{-f} |
252b5132 RH |
1387 | |
1388 | @kindex -f | |
1389 | @cindex trusted compiler | |
a4fb0134 | 1390 | @cindex faster processing (@option{-f}) |
252b5132 RH |
1391 | @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a |
1392 | (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace | |
1393 | and comment preprocessing on | |
1394 | the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing, | |
1395 | ,Preprocessing}. | |
1396 | ||
1397 | @quotation | |
1398 | @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be | |
a4fb0134 | 1399 | preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does |
252b5132 RH |
1400 | not work correctly. |
1401 | @end quotation | |
1402 | ||
1403 | @node I | |
a4fb0134 | 1404 | @section @code{.include} search path: @option{-I} @var{path} |
252b5132 RH |
1405 | |
1406 | @kindex -I @var{path} | |
1407 | @cindex paths for @code{.include} | |
1408 | @cindex search path for @code{.include} | |
1409 | @cindex @code{include} directive search path | |
1410 | Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories | |
a4fb0134 SC |
1411 | @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include} |
1412 | directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as | |
252b5132 | 1413 | many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current |
a4fb0134 | 1414 | working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}} |
252b5132 RH |
1415 | searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were |
1416 | specified (left to right) on the command line. | |
1417 | ||
1418 | @node K | |
a4fb0134 | 1419 | @section Difference Tables: @option{-K} |
252b5132 RH |
1420 | |
1421 | @kindex -K | |
1422 | @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE | |
1423 | On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is | |
1424 | permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms, | |
1425 | where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code | |
1426 | generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET} | |
1427 | family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this | |
1428 | alteration on other platforms. | |
1429 | @end ifclear | |
1430 | ||
1431 | @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE | |
1432 | @cindex difference tables, warning | |
1433 | @cindex warning for altered difference tables | |
a4fb0134 | 1434 | @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the form |
252b5132 RH |
1435 | @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}; @pxref{Word,,@code{.word}}. |
1436 | You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this | |
1437 | is done. | |
1438 | @end ifset | |
1439 | ||
1440 | @node L | |
a4fb0134 | 1441 | @section Include Local Labels: @option{-L} |
252b5132 RH |
1442 | |
1443 | @kindex -L | |
1444 | @cindex local labels, retaining in output | |
1445 | Labels beginning with @samp{L} (upper case only) are called @dfn{local | |
1446 | labels}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see such labels when | |
1447 | debugging, because they are intended for the use of programs (like | |
1448 | compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your notice. | |
a4fb0134 | 1449 | Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard such labels, so you do not |
252b5132 RH |
1450 | normally debug with them. |
1451 | ||
a4fb0134 | 1452 | This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those @samp{L@dots{}} symbols |
252b5132 RH |
1453 | in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker |
1454 | @code{@value{LD}} to preserve symbols whose names begin with @samp{L}. | |
1455 | ||
1456 | By default, a local label is any label beginning with @samp{L}, but each | |
1457 | target is allowed to redefine the local label prefix. | |
1458 | @ifset HPPA | |
1459 | On the HPPA local labels begin with @samp{L$}. | |
1460 | @end ifset | |
252b5132 | 1461 | |
c3a27914 | 1462 | @node listing |
a4fb0134 | 1463 | @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing} |
c3a27914 NC |
1464 | |
1465 | The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch | |
1466 | @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a | |
1467 | hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays | |
1468 | them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by pseudo | |
1469 | ops inside the assembler source (@pxref{List} @pxref{Title} @pxref{Sbttl} | |
1470 | @pxref{Psize} @pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches: | |
1471 | ||
a4fb0134 | 1472 | @table @gcctabopt |
c3a27914 NC |
1473 | @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number} |
1474 | @kindex --listing-lhs-width | |
1475 | @cindex Width of first line disassembly output | |
1476 | Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This | |
1477 | dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output. | |
1478 | ||
1479 | @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number} | |
1480 | @kindex --listing-lhs-width2 | |
1481 | @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output | |
1482 | Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for | |
1483 | a given inut source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being | |
1484 | the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither | |
1485 | switch is used the default is to one. | |
1486 | ||
1487 | @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number} | |
1488 | @kindex --listing-rhs-width | |
1489 | @cindex Width of source line output | |
1490 | Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed | |
1491 | alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The | |
1492 | source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output. | |
1493 | ||
1494 | @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number} | |
1495 | @kindex --listing-cont-lines | |
1496 | @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines | |
1497 | Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be | |
1498 | displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4. | |
1499 | @end table | |
1500 | ||
252b5132 | 1501 | @node M |
a4fb0134 | 1502 | @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M} |
252b5132 RH |
1503 | |
1504 | @kindex -M | |
1505 | @cindex MRI compatibility mode | |
a4fb0134 SC |
1506 | The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This |
1507 | changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it | |
252b5132 RH |
1508 | compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the |
1509 | configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the | |
1510 | MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more | |
1511 | information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro | |
1512 | arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit | |
a4fb0134 | 1513 | assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}. |
252b5132 RH |
1514 | |
1515 | The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler | |
1516 | depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object | |
1517 | file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format | |
1518 | individually. These are: | |
1519 | ||
1520 | @itemize @bullet | |
1521 | @item global symbols in common section | |
1522 | ||
1523 | The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker. | |
a4fb0134 | 1524 | Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles |
252b5132 RH |
1525 | common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local |
1526 | symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global | |
1527 | symbols, since it has no way to describe them. | |
1528 | ||
1529 | @item complex relocations | |
1530 | ||
1531 | The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and | |
1532 | relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These | |
1533 | are not support by other object file formats. | |
1534 | ||
1535 | @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address | |
1536 | ||
1537 | The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address. | |
1538 | This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may | |
a4fb0134 | 1539 | instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker |
252b5132 RH |
1540 | script. |
1541 | ||
1542 | @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops | |
1543 | ||
1544 | The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module | |
1545 | name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats. | |
1546 | ||
1547 | @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op | |
1548 | ||
1549 | The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given | |
a4fb0134 | 1550 | address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op, |
252b5132 RH |
1551 | which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are |
1552 | not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be | |
1553 | assigned within a linker script. | |
1554 | @end itemize | |
1555 | ||
1556 | There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by | |
a4fb0134 | 1557 | @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they |
252b5132 RH |
1558 | seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases. |
1559 | ||
1560 | @itemize @bullet | |
1561 | ||
1562 | @item EBCDIC strings | |
1563 | ||
1564 | EBCDIC strings are not supported. | |
1565 | ||
1566 | @item packed binary coded decimal | |
1567 | ||
1568 | Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P} | |
1569 | and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported. | |
1570 | ||
1571 | @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op | |
1572 | ||
1573 | The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported. | |
1574 | ||
1575 | @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op | |
1576 | ||
1577 | The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported. | |
1578 | ||
1579 | @item @code{OPT} branch control options | |
1580 | ||
1581 | The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB}, | |
a4fb0134 | 1582 | @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically |
252b5132 RH |
1583 | relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so |
1584 | these options serve no purpose. | |
1585 | ||
1586 | @item @code{OPT} list control options | |
1587 | ||
1588 | The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C}, | |
1589 | @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M}, | |
1590 | @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}. | |
1591 | ||
1592 | @item other @code{OPT} options | |
1593 | ||
1594 | The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O}, | |
1595 | @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}. | |
1596 | ||
1597 | @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default | |
1598 | ||
1599 | The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler. | |
1600 | @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off. | |
1601 | ||
1602 | @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op. | |
1603 | ||
1604 | The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored. | |
1605 | ||
1606 | @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op | |
1607 | ||
1608 | The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported. | |
1609 | ||
1610 | @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op | |
1611 | ||
1612 | The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported. | |
1613 | ||
1614 | @item @code{.list} pseudo-op. | |
1615 | ||
1616 | The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported. | |
1617 | ||
1618 | @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op | |
1619 | ||
1620 | The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported. | |
1621 | ||
1622 | @item @code{.output} pseudo-op | |
1623 | ||
1624 | The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported. | |
1625 | ||
1626 | @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op | |
1627 | ||
1628 | The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported. | |
1629 | ||
1630 | @end itemize | |
1631 | ||
1632 | @node MD | |
a4fb0134 | 1633 | @section Dependency tracking: @option{--MD} |
252b5132 RH |
1634 | |
1635 | @kindex --MD | |
1636 | @cindex dependency tracking | |
1637 | @cindex make rules | |
1638 | ||
a4fb0134 | 1639 | @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This |
252b5132 RH |
1640 | file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the |
1641 | dependencies of the main source file. | |
1642 | ||
1643 | The rule is written to the file named in its argument. | |
1644 | ||
1645 | This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles. | |
1646 | ||
1647 | @node o | |
a4fb0134 | 1648 | @section Name the Object File: @option{-o} |
252b5132 RH |
1649 | |
1650 | @kindex -o | |
1651 | @cindex naming object file | |
1652 | @cindex object file name | |
a4fb0134 | 1653 | There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By |
252b5132 RH |
1654 | default it has the name |
1655 | @ifset GENERIC | |
1656 | @ifset I960 | |
1657 | @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only). | |
1658 | @end ifset | |
1659 | @ifclear I960 | |
1660 | @file{a.out}. | |
1661 | @end ifclear | |
1662 | @end ifset | |
1663 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
1664 | @ifset I960 | |
1665 | @file{b.out}. | |
1666 | @end ifset | |
1667 | @ifclear I960 | |
1668 | @file{a.out}. | |
1669 | @end ifclear | |
1670 | @end ifclear | |
1671 | You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the | |
1672 | object file a different name. | |
1673 | ||
a4fb0134 | 1674 | Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any |
252b5132 RH |
1675 | existing file of the same name. |
1676 | ||
1677 | @node R | |
a4fb0134 | 1678 | @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R} |
252b5132 RH |
1679 | |
1680 | @kindex -R | |
1681 | @cindex data and text sections, joining | |
1682 | @cindex text and data sections, joining | |
1683 | @cindex joining text and data sections | |
1684 | @cindex merging text and data sections | |
a4fb0134 | 1685 | @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all |
252b5132 RH |
1686 | data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at |
1687 | the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data | |
1688 | section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of | |
1689 | your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are | |
1690 | appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.) | |
1691 | ||
a4fb0134 | 1692 | When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter |
252b5132 RH |
1693 | address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and |
1694 | data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with | |
a4fb0134 | 1695 | older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way. |
252b5132 RH |
1696 | |
1697 | @ifset COFF | |
a4fb0134 | 1698 | When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF output, |
252b5132 RH |
1699 | this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and |
1700 | @samp{.data}. | |
1701 | @end ifset | |
1702 | ||
1703 | @ifset HPPA | |
a4fb0134 SC |
1704 | @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using |
1705 | @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}. | |
252b5132 RH |
1706 | @end ifset |
1707 | ||
1708 | @node statistics | |
a4fb0134 | 1709 | @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics} |
252b5132 RH |
1710 | |
1711 | @kindex --statistics | |
1712 | @cindex statistics, about assembly | |
1713 | @cindex time, total for assembly | |
1714 | @cindex space used, maximum for assembly | |
1715 | Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by | |
a4fb0134 | 1716 | @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly |
252b5132 RH |
1717 | (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu} |
1718 | seconds). | |
1719 | ||
1720 | @node traditional-format | |
a4fb0134 | 1721 | @section Compatible output: @option{--traditional-format} |
252b5132 RH |
1722 | |
1723 | @kindex --traditional-format | |
a4fb0134 | 1724 | For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways |
252b5132 | 1725 | from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests |
a4fb0134 | 1726 | @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead. |
252b5132 RH |
1727 | |
1728 | For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which | |
a4fb0134 | 1729 | @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output. |
252b5132 RH |
1730 | |
1731 | @node v | |
a4fb0134 | 1732 | @section Announce Version: @option{-v} |
252b5132 RH |
1733 | |
1734 | @kindex -v | |
1735 | @kindex -version | |
1736 | @cindex assembler version | |
1737 | @cindex version of assembler | |
1738 | You can find out what version of as is running by including the | |
1739 | option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the | |
1740 | command line. | |
1741 | ||
1742 | @node W | |
a4fb0134 | 1743 | @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings} |
252b5132 | 1744 | |
a4fb0134 | 1745 | @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when |
252b5132 | 1746 | assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often |
a4fb0134 | 1747 | cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was |
252b5132 | 1748 | made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file. |
2bdd6cf5 GK |
1749 | |
1750 | @kindex @samp{-W} | |
1751 | @kindex @samp{--no-warn} | |
1752 | @cindex suppressing warnings | |
1753 | @cindex warnings, suppressing | |
a4fb0134 | 1754 | If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued. |
2bdd6cf5 | 1755 | This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of |
a4fb0134 | 1756 | how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly, |
2bdd6cf5 GK |
1757 | are still reported. |
1758 | ||
1759 | @kindex @samp{--fatal-warnings} | |
1760 | @cindex errors, caused by warnings | |
1761 | @cindex warnings, causing error | |
a4fb0134 | 1762 | If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers |
2bdd6cf5 GK |
1763 | files that generate warnings to be in error. |
1764 | ||
1765 | @kindex @samp{--warn} | |
1766 | @cindex warnings, switching on | |
a4fb0134 | 1767 | You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which |
2bdd6cf5 | 1768 | causes warnings to be output as usual. |
252b5132 RH |
1769 | |
1770 | @node Z | |
a4fb0134 | 1771 | @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z} |
252b5132 RH |
1772 | @cindex object file, after errors |
1773 | @cindex errors, continuing after | |
a4fb0134 | 1774 | After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for |
252b5132 | 1775 | some reason you are interested in object file output even after |
a4fb0134 SC |
1776 | @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z} |
1777 | option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and | |
252b5132 RH |
1778 | writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n} |
1779 | errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.} | |
1780 | ||
1781 | @node Syntax | |
1782 | @chapter Syntax | |
1783 | ||
1784 | @cindex machine-independent syntax | |
1785 | @cindex syntax, machine-independent | |
1786 | This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a | |
a4fb0134 | 1787 | source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other |
252b5132 RH |
1788 | assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2 |
1789 | @ifclear VAX | |
1790 | assembler. | |
1791 | @end ifclear | |
1792 | @ifset VAX | |
a4fb0134 | 1793 | assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields. |
252b5132 RH |
1794 | @end ifset |
1795 | ||
1796 | @menu | |
1797 | * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing | |
1798 | * Whitespace:: Whitespace | |
1799 | * Comments:: Comments | |
1800 | * Symbol Intro:: Symbols | |
1801 | * Statements:: Statements | |
1802 | * Constants:: Constants | |
1803 | @end menu | |
1804 | ||
1805 | @node Preprocessing | |
1806 | @section Preprocessing | |
1807 | ||
1808 | @cindex preprocessing | |
a4fb0134 | 1809 | The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor: |
252b5132 RH |
1810 | @itemize @bullet |
1811 | @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor | |
1812 | @item | |
1813 | adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before | |
1814 | the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into | |
1815 | a single space. | |
1816 | ||
1817 | @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor | |
1818 | @item | |
1819 | removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an | |
1820 | appropriate number of newlines. | |
1821 | ||
1822 | @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor | |
1823 | @item | |
1824 | converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values. | |
1825 | @end itemize | |
1826 | ||
1827 | It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or | |
1828 | anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can | |
1829 | do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive | |
1830 | (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver | |
1831 | to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing, by giving the input file a | |
1832 | @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options,, Options Controlling the Kind of | |
1833 | Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}. | |
1834 | ||
1835 | Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants | |
1836 | cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not | |
1837 | preprocessed. | |
1838 | ||
1839 | @cindex turning preprocessing on and off | |
1840 | @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off | |
1841 | @kindex #NO_APP | |
1842 | @kindex #APP | |
1843 | If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the | |
1844 | @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file. | |
1845 | Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in | |
1846 | specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the | |
1847 | text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says | |
1848 | @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support | |
1849 | @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments | |
1850 | and whitespace. | |
1851 | ||
1852 | @node Whitespace | |
1853 | @section Whitespace | |
1854 | ||
1855 | @cindex whitespace | |
1856 | @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order. | |
1857 | Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for | |
1858 | people to read. Unless within character constants | |
1859 | (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same | |
1860 | as exactly one space. | |
1861 | ||
1862 | @node Comments | |
1863 | @section Comments | |
1864 | ||
1865 | @cindex comments | |
a4fb0134 | 1866 | There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both |
252b5132 RH |
1867 | cases the comment is equivalent to one space. |
1868 | ||
1869 | Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment. | |
1870 | This means you may not nest these comments. | |
1871 | ||
1872 | @smallexample | |
1873 | /* | |
1874 | The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment | |
1875 | is to use this sort of comment. | |
1876 | */ | |
1877 | ||
1878 | /* This sort of comment does not nest. */ | |
1879 | @end smallexample | |
1880 | ||
1881 | @cindex line comment character | |
1882 | Anything from the @dfn{line comment} character to the next newline | |
1883 | is considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is | |
1884 | @ifset A29K | |
1885 | @samp{;} for the AMD 29K family; | |
1886 | @end ifset | |
1887 | @ifset ARC | |
1888 | @samp{;} on the ARC; | |
1889 | @end ifset | |
550262c4 NC |
1890 | @ifset ARM |
1891 | @samp{@@} on the ARM; | |
1892 | @end ifset | |
252b5132 RH |
1893 | @ifset H8/300 |
1894 | @samp{;} for the H8/300 family; | |
1895 | @end ifset | |
1896 | @ifset H8/500 | |
1897 | @samp{!} for the H8/500 family; | |
1898 | @end ifset | |
1899 | @ifset HPPA | |
1900 | @samp{;} for the HPPA; | |
1901 | @end ifset | |
55b62671 AJ |
1902 | @ifset I80386 |
1903 | @samp{#} on the i386 and x86-64; | |
1904 | @end ifset | |
252b5132 RH |
1905 | @ifset I960 |
1906 | @samp{#} on the i960; | |
1907 | @end ifset | |
e135f41b NC |
1908 | @ifset PDP11 |
1909 | @samp{;} for the PDP-11; | |
1910 | @end ifset | |
041dd5a9 ILT |
1911 | @ifset PJ |
1912 | @samp{;} for picoJava; | |
1913 | @end ifset | |
418c1742 MG |
1914 | @ifset PPC |
1915 | @samp{;} for Motorola PowerPC; | |
1916 | @end ifset | |
252b5132 RH |
1917 | @ifset SH |
1918 | @samp{!} for the Hitachi SH; | |
1919 | @end ifset | |
1920 | @ifset SPARC | |
1921 | @samp{!} on the SPARC; | |
1922 | @end ifset | |
1923 | @ifset M32R | |
1924 | @samp{#} on the m32r; | |
1925 | @end ifset | |
1926 | @ifset M680X0 | |
1927 | @samp{|} on the 680x0; | |
1928 | @end ifset | |
60bcf0fa NC |
1929 | @ifset M68HC11 |
1930 | @samp{#} on the 68HC11 and 68HC12; | |
1931 | @end ifset | |
81b0b3f1 BE |
1932 | @ifset M880X0 |
1933 | @samp{;} on the M880x0; | |
1934 | @end ifset | |
252b5132 RH |
1935 | @ifset VAX |
1936 | @samp{#} on the Vax; | |
1937 | @end ifset | |
1938 | @ifset Z8000 | |
1939 | @samp{!} for the Z8000; | |
1940 | @end ifset | |
1941 | @ifset V850 | |
1942 | @samp{#} on the V850; | |
1943 | @end ifset | |
1944 | see @ref{Machine Dependencies}. @refill | |
81b0b3f1 | 1945 | @c FIXME What about i860? |
252b5132 RH |
1946 | |
1947 | @ifset GENERIC | |
1948 | On some machines there are two different line comment characters. One | |
1949 | character only begins a comment if it is the first non-whitespace character on | |
1950 | a line, while the other always begins a comment. | |
1951 | @end ifset | |
1952 | ||
1953 | @ifset V850 | |
1954 | The V850 assembler also supports a double dash as starting a comment that | |
1955 | extends to the end of the line. | |
1956 | ||
1957 | @samp{--}; | |
1958 | @end ifset | |
1959 | ||
1960 | @kindex # | |
1961 | @cindex lines starting with @code{#} | |
1962 | @cindex logical line numbers | |
1963 | To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a | |
1964 | special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute | |
1965 | expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next} | |
1966 | line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings,, Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a | |
1967 | new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace. | |
1968 | ||
1969 | If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric, | |
1970 | the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.) | |
1971 | ||
1972 | @smallexample | |
1973 | # This is an ordinary comment. | |
1974 | # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name | |
1975 | # This is logical line # 36. | |
1976 | @end smallexample | |
1977 | This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions | |
a4fb0134 | 1978 | of @command{@value{AS}}. |
252b5132 RH |
1979 | |
1980 | @node Symbol Intro | |
1981 | @section Symbols | |
1982 | ||
1983 | @cindex characters used in symbols | |
1984 | @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS | |
1985 | A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all | |
1986 | letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters | |
1987 | @samp{_.$}. | |
1988 | @end ifclear | |
1989 | @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS | |
1990 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
1991 | @ifset H8 | |
1992 | A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all | |
1993 | letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters | |
1994 | @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in | |
1995 | symbol names.) | |
1996 | @end ifset | |
1997 | @end ifclear | |
1998 | @end ifset | |
1999 | @ifset GENERIC | |
2000 | On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions | |
2001 | are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. | |
2002 | @end ifset | |
2003 | No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant. | |
2004 | There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Symbols are | |
2005 | delimited by characters not in that set, or by the beginning of a file | |
2006 | (since the source program must end with a newline, the end of a file is | |
2007 | not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}. | |
2008 | @cindex length of symbols | |
2009 | ||
2010 | @node Statements | |
2011 | @section Statements | |
2012 | ||
2013 | @cindex statements, structure of | |
2014 | @cindex line separator character | |
2015 | @cindex statement separator character | |
2016 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
2017 | @ifclear abnormal-separator | |
2018 | A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or at a | |
2019 | semicolon (@samp{;}). The newline or semicolon is considered part of | |
2020 | the preceding statement. Newlines and semicolons within character | |
2021 | constants are an exception: they do not end statements. | |
2022 | @end ifclear | |
2023 | @ifset abnormal-separator | |
2024 | @ifset A29K | |
2025 | A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or an ``at'' | |
2026 | sign (@samp{@@}). The newline or at sign is considered part of the | |
2027 | preceding statement. Newlines and at signs within character constants | |
2028 | are an exception: they do not end statements. | |
2029 | @end ifset | |
2030 | @ifset HPPA | |
2031 | A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or an exclamation | |
2032 | point (@samp{!}). The newline or exclamation point is considered part of the | |
2033 | preceding statement. Newlines and exclamation points within character | |
2034 | constants are an exception: they do not end statements. | |
2035 | @end ifset | |
2036 | @ifset H8 | |
2037 | A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}); or (for the | |
2038 | H8/300) a dollar sign (@samp{$}); or (for the | |
2039 | Hitachi-SH or the | |
2040 | H8/500) a semicolon | |
2041 | (@samp{;}). The newline or separator character is considered part of | |
2042 | the preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character | |
2043 | constants are an exception: they do not end statements. | |
2044 | @end ifset | |
2045 | @end ifset | |
2046 | @end ifclear | |
2047 | @ifset GENERIC | |
2048 | A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or line | |
2049 | separator character. (The line separator is usually @samp{;}, unless | |
2050 | this conflicts with the comment character; @pxref{Machine Dependencies}.) The | |
2051 | newline or separator character is considered part of the preceding | |
2052 | statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an | |
2053 | exception: they do not end statements. | |
2054 | @end ifset | |
2055 | ||
2056 | @cindex newline, required at file end | |
2057 | @cindex EOF, newline must precede | |
2058 | It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last | |
2059 | character of any input file should be a newline.@refill | |
2060 | ||
2061 | An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored. | |
2062 | ||
2063 | @cindex instructions and directives | |
2064 | @cindex directives and instructions | |
2065 | @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to | |
2066 | @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com, | |
2067 | @c 13feb91. | |
2068 | A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a | |
2069 | key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key | |
2070 | symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the | |
2071 | symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler | |
2072 | directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with | |
2073 | a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it | |
2074 | assembles into a machine language instruction. | |
2075 | @ifset GENERIC | |
a4fb0134 | 2076 | Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers |
252b5132 RH |
2077 | recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may |
2078 | represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly | |
2079 | language.@refill | |
2080 | @end ifset | |
2081 | ||
2082 | @cindex @code{:} (label) | |
2083 | @cindex label (@code{:}) | |
2084 | A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}). | |
2085 | Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not | |
2086 | have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}. | |
2087 | ||
2088 | @ifset HPPA | |
2089 | For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but | |
2090 | the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that | |
2091 | only one label may be defined on each line. | |
2092 | @end ifset | |
2093 | ||
2094 | @smallexample | |
2095 | label: .directive followed by something | |
2096 | another_label: # This is an empty statement. | |
2097 | instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{} | |
2098 | @end smallexample | |
2099 | ||
2100 | @node Constants | |
2101 | @section Constants | |
2102 | ||
2103 | @cindex constants | |
2104 | A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by | |
2105 | inspection, without knowing any context. Like this: | |
2106 | @smallexample | |
2107 | @group | |
2108 | .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value. | |
2109 | .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant. | |
2110 | .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum. | |
2111 | .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\ | |
2112 | 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum. | |
2113 | @end group | |
2114 | @end smallexample | |
2115 | ||
2116 | @menu | |
2117 | * Characters:: Character Constants | |
2118 | * Numbers:: Number Constants | |
2119 | @end menu | |
2120 | ||
2121 | @node Characters | |
2122 | @subsection Character Constants | |
2123 | ||
2124 | @cindex character constants | |
2125 | @cindex constants, character | |
2126 | There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands | |
2127 | for one character in one byte and its value may be used in | |
2128 | numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string | |
2129 | @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be | |
2130 | used in arithmetic expressions. | |
2131 | ||
2132 | @menu | |
2133 | * Strings:: Strings | |
2134 | * Chars:: Characters | |
2135 | @end menu | |
2136 | ||
2137 | @node Strings | |
2138 | @subsubsection Strings | |
2139 | ||
2140 | @cindex string constants | |
2141 | @cindex constants, string | |
2142 | A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain | |
2143 | double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters | |
2144 | into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with | |
2145 | a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents | |
2146 | one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells | |
a4fb0134 SC |
2147 | @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash |
2148 | (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an | |
252b5132 RH |
2149 | escape character). The complete list of escapes follows. |
2150 | ||
2151 | @cindex escape codes, character | |
2152 | @cindex character escape codes | |
2153 | @table @kbd | |
2154 | @c @item \a | |
2155 | @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007. | |
2156 | @c | |
2157 | @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character) | |
2158 | @cindex backspace (@code{\b}) | |
2159 | @item \b | |
2160 | Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010. | |
2161 | ||
2162 | @c @item \e | |
2163 | @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004. | |
2164 | @c | |
2165 | @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character) | |
2166 | @cindex formfeed (@code{\f}) | |
2167 | @item \f | |
2168 | Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014. | |
2169 | ||
2170 | @cindex @code{\n} (newline character) | |
2171 | @cindex newline (@code{\n}) | |
2172 | @item \n | |
2173 | Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012. | |
2174 | ||
2175 | @c @item \p | |
2176 | @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}. | |
2177 | @c | |
2178 | @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character) | |
2179 | @cindex carriage return (@code{\r}) | |
2180 | @item \r | |
2181 | Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015. | |
2182 | ||
2183 | @c @item \s | |
2184 | @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with | |
2185 | @c other assemblers. | |
2186 | @c | |
2187 | @cindex @code{\t} (tab) | |
2188 | @cindex tab (@code{\t}) | |
2189 | @item \t | |
2190 | Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011. | |
2191 | ||
2192 | @c @item \v | |
2193 | @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013. | |
2194 | @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit} | |
2195 | @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits. | |
2196 | @c | |
2197 | @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code) | |
2198 | @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}}) | |
2199 | @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit} | |
2200 | An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits. | |
2201 | For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits: | |
2202 | for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011. | |
2203 | ||
2204 | @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code) | |
2205 | @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}}) | |
2206 | @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...} | |
2207 | A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or | |
2208 | lower case @code{x} works. | |
2209 | ||
2210 | @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character) | |
2211 | @cindex backslash (@code{\\}) | |
2212 | @item \\ | |
2213 | Represents one @samp{\} character. | |
2214 | ||
2215 | @c @item \' | |
2216 | @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character. | |
2217 | @c This is needed in single character literals | |
2218 | @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent | |
2219 | @c a @samp{'}. | |
2220 | @c | |
2221 | @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character) | |
2222 | @cindex doublequote (@code{\"}) | |
2223 | @item \" | |
2224 | Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent | |
2225 | this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string. | |
2226 | ||
2227 | @item \ @var{anything-else} | |
2228 | Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but | |
2229 | assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if | |
2230 | you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal | |
a4fb0134 SC |
2231 | interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no |
2232 | other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong | |
252b5132 RH |
2233 | code and warns you of the fact. |
2234 | @end table | |
2235 | ||
2236 | Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent, | |
2237 | varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think | |
2238 | the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C | |
2239 | compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape | |
2240 | sequence. | |
2241 | ||
2242 | @node Chars | |
2243 | @subsubsection Characters | |
2244 | ||
2245 | @cindex single character constant | |
2246 | @cindex character, single | |
2247 | @cindex constant, single character | |
2248 | A single character may be written as a single quote immediately | |
2249 | followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as | |
2250 | to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you | |
2251 | must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second | |
2252 | @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a | |
2253 | grave accent. A newline | |
2254 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
2255 | @ifclear abnormal-separator | |
2256 | (or semicolon @samp{;}) | |
2257 | @end ifclear | |
2258 | @ifset abnormal-separator | |
2259 | @ifset A29K | |
2260 | (or at sign @samp{@@}) | |
2261 | @end ifset | |
2262 | @ifset H8 | |
2263 | (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the | |
2264 | Hitachi SH or | |
2265 | H8/500) | |
2266 | @end ifset | |
2267 | @end ifset | |
2268 | @end ifclear | |
2269 | immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character | |
2270 | and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character | |
2271 | constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for | |
a4fb0134 | 2272 | that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII: |
252b5132 RH |
2273 | @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill |
2274 | ||
2275 | @node Numbers | |
2276 | @subsection Number Constants | |
2277 | ||
2278 | @cindex constants, number | |
2279 | @cindex number constants | |
a4fb0134 | 2280 | @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they |
252b5132 RH |
2281 | are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that |
2282 | would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are | |
2283 | integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums} | |
2284 | are floating point numbers, described below. | |
2285 | ||
2286 | @menu | |
2287 | * Integers:: Integers | |
2288 | * Bignums:: Bignums | |
2289 | * Flonums:: Flonums | |
2290 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
2291 | @ifset I960 | |
2292 | * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields | |
2293 | @end ifset | |
2294 | @end ifclear | |
2295 | @end menu | |
2296 | ||
2297 | @node Integers | |
2298 | @subsubsection Integers | |
2299 | @cindex integers | |
2300 | @cindex constants, integer | |
2301 | ||
2302 | @cindex binary integers | |
2303 | @cindex integers, binary | |
2304 | A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of | |
2305 | the binary digits @samp{01}. | |
2306 | ||
2307 | @cindex octal integers | |
2308 | @cindex integers, octal | |
2309 | An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal | |
2310 | digits (@samp{01234567}). | |
2311 | ||
2312 | @cindex decimal integers | |
2313 | @cindex integers, decimal | |
2314 | A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or | |
2315 | more digits (@samp{0123456789}). | |
2316 | ||
2317 | @cindex hexadecimal integers | |
2318 | @cindex integers, hexadecimal | |
2319 | A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or | |
2320 | more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}. | |
2321 | ||
2322 | Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use | |
2323 | the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions | |
2324 | (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}). | |
2325 | ||
2326 | @node Bignums | |
2327 | @subsubsection Bignums | |
2328 | ||
2329 | @cindex bignums | |
2330 | @cindex constants, bignum | |
2331 | A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer | |
2332 | except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to | |
2333 | represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places | |
2334 | integers are permitted while bignums are not. | |
2335 | ||
2336 | @node Flonums | |
2337 | @subsubsection Flonums | |
2338 | @cindex flonums | |
2339 | @cindex floating point numbers | |
2340 | @cindex constants, floating point | |
2341 | ||
2342 | @cindex precision, floating point | |
2343 | A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is | |
2344 | indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by | |
a4fb0134 | 2345 | @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than |
252b5132 RH |
2346 | sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted |
2347 | to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a | |
a4fb0134 | 2348 | portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer. |
252b5132 RH |
2349 | |
2350 | A flonum is written by writing (in order) | |
2351 | @itemize @bullet | |
2352 | @item | |
2353 | The digit @samp{0}. | |
2354 | @ifset HPPA | |
2355 | (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.) | |
2356 | @end ifset | |
2357 | ||
2358 | @item | |
a4fb0134 | 2359 | A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum. |
252b5132 RH |
2360 | @ifset GENERIC |
2361 | @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important. | |
2362 | @ignore | |
2363 | @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases | |
2364 | (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD | |
2365 | 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.) | |
2366 | @end ignore | |
2367 | ||
2368 | On the H8/300, H8/500, | |
2369 | Hitachi SH, | |
2370 | and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be | |
2371 | one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case). | |
2372 | ||
2373 | On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS} | |
2374 | (in upper or lower case). | |
2375 | ||
2376 | On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be | |
2377 | one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case). | |
2378 | ||
2379 | On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only). | |
2380 | @end ifset | |
2381 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
2382 | @ifset A29K | |
2383 | One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case). | |
2384 | @end ifset | |
2385 | @ifset ARC | |
2386 | One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case). | |
2387 | @end ifset | |
2388 | @ifset H8 | |
2389 | One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case). | |
2390 | @end ifset | |
2391 | @ifset HPPA | |
2392 | The letter @samp{E} (upper case only). | |
2393 | @end ifset | |
2394 | @ifset I960 | |
2395 | One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case). | |
2396 | @end ifset | |
2397 | @end ifclear | |
2398 | ||
2399 | @item | |
2400 | An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}. | |
2401 | ||
2402 | @item | |
2403 | An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits. | |
2404 | ||
2405 | @item | |
2406 | An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero | |
2407 | or more decimal digits. | |
2408 | ||
2409 | @item | |
2410 | An optional exponent, consisting of: | |
2411 | ||
2412 | @itemize @bullet | |
2413 | @item | |
2414 | An @samp{E} or @samp{e}. | |
2415 | @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in | |
2416 | @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets. | |
2417 | @item | |
2418 | Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}. | |
2419 | @item | |
2420 | One or more decimal digits. | |
2421 | @end itemize | |
2422 | ||
2423 | @end itemize | |
2424 | ||
2425 | At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be | |
2426 | present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value. | |
2427 | ||
a4fb0134 | 2428 | @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed |
252b5132 | 2429 | independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running |
a4fb0134 | 2430 | @command{@value{AS}}. |
252b5132 RH |
2431 | |
2432 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
2433 | @ifset I960 | |
2434 | @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled | |
2435 | @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91) | |
2436 | @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS. | |
2437 | @node Bit Fields | |
2438 | @subsubsection Bit Fields | |
2439 | ||
2440 | @cindex bit fields | |
2441 | @cindex constants, bit field | |
2442 | You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}. | |
2443 | specify two numbers separated by a colon--- | |
2444 | @example | |
2445 | @var{mask}:@var{value} | |
2446 | @end example | |
2447 | @noindent | |
a4fb0134 | 2448 | @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and |
252b5132 RH |
2449 | @var{value}. |
2450 | ||
2451 | The resulting number is then packed | |
2452 | @ifset GENERIC | |
2453 | @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960 | |
2454 | (in host-dependent byte order) | |
2455 | @end ifset | |
2456 | into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the | |
2457 | bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and | |
2458 | requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead, | |
2459 | more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the | |
2460 | least significant digits.@refill | |
2461 | ||
2462 | The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long}, | |
2463 | @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments. | |
2464 | @end ifset | |
2465 | @end ifclear | |
2466 | ||
2467 | @node Sections | |
2468 | @chapter Sections and Relocation | |
2469 | @cindex sections | |
2470 | @cindex relocation | |
2471 | ||
2472 | @menu | |
2473 | * Secs Background:: Background | |
2474 | * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections | |
2475 | * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections | |
2476 | * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections | |
2477 | * bss:: bss Section | |
2478 | @end menu | |
2479 | ||
2480 | @node Secs Background | |
2481 | @section Background | |
2482 | ||
2483 | Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data | |
2484 | ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose. | |
2485 | For example there may be a ``read only'' section. | |
2486 | ||
2487 | @cindex linker, and assembler | |
2488 | @cindex assembler, and linker | |
2489 | The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and | |
a4fb0134 | 2490 | combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}} |
252b5132 RH |
2491 | emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0. |
2492 | @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that | |
2493 | different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an | |
a4fb0134 | 2494 | oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses |
252b5132 RH |
2495 | sections. |
2496 | ||
2497 | @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time | |
2498 | addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid | |
2499 | units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes | |
2500 | within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning | |
2501 | run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes | |
2502 | the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to | |
2503 | the proper run-time addresses. | |
2504 | @ifset H8 | |
2505 | For the H8/300 and H8/500, | |
2506 | and for the Hitachi SH, | |
a4fb0134 | 2507 | @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to |
252b5132 RH |
2508 | ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary. |
2509 | @end ifset | |
2510 | ||
2511 | @cindex standard assembler sections | |
a4fb0134 | 2512 | An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any |
252b5132 RH |
2513 | of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and |
2514 | @dfn{bss} sections. | |
2515 | ||
2516 | @ifset COFF | |
2517 | @ifset GENERIC | |
2518 | When it generates COFF output, | |
2519 | @end ifset | |
a4fb0134 | 2520 | @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify |
252b5132 RH |
2521 | using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}). |
2522 | If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text} | |
2523 | or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty. | |
2524 | @end ifset | |
2525 | ||
2526 | @ifset HPPA | |
2527 | @ifset GENERIC | |
a4fb0134 | 2528 | When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA, |
252b5132 | 2529 | @end ifset |
a4fb0134 | 2530 | @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you |
252b5132 RH |
2531 | specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See |
2532 | @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual} | |
2533 | (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} | |
2534 | assembler directives. | |
2535 | ||
2536 | @ifset SOM | |
a4fb0134 | 2537 | Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard |
252b5132 RH |
2538 | text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text |
2539 | is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and | |
2540 | BSS into @samp{$BSS$}. | |
2541 | @end ifset | |
2542 | @end ifset | |
2543 | ||
2544 | Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the | |
2545 | data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section. | |
2546 | ||
2547 | @ifset HPPA | |
2548 | When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text | |
2549 | section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address | |
2550 | @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section. | |
2551 | @end ifset | |
2552 | ||
2553 | To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are | |
a4fb0134 | 2554 | relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the |
252b5132 RH |
2555 | object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation |
2556 | @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object | |
2557 | file is mentioned: | |
2558 | @itemize @bullet | |
2559 | @item | |
2560 | Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to | |
2561 | an address? | |
2562 | @item | |
2563 | How long (in bytes) is this reference? | |
2564 | @item | |
2565 | Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of | |
2566 | @display | |
2567 | (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})? | |
2568 | @end display | |
2569 | @item | |
2570 | Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''? | |
2571 | @end itemize | |
2572 | ||
2573 | @cindex addresses, format of | |
2574 | @cindex section-relative addressing | |
a4fb0134 | 2575 | In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as |
252b5132 RH |
2576 | @display |
2577 | (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section}) | |
2578 | @end display | |
2579 | @noindent | |
a4fb0134 | 2580 | Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative |
252b5132 RH |
2581 | nature. |
2582 | @ifset SOM | |
2583 | (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are | |
2584 | symbol-relative instead.) | |
2585 | @end ifset | |
2586 | ||
2587 | In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset | |
2588 | @var{N} into section @var{secname}.'' | |
2589 | ||
2590 | Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the | |
2591 | @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs, | |
2592 | addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address | |
2593 | @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by | |
2594 | @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs' | |
2595 | data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition} | |
2596 | their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one | |
2597 | part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as | |
2598 | address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program. | |
2599 | ||
2600 | The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any | |
2601 | address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition | |
2602 | rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later. | |
2603 | Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined | |
2604 | address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named | |
2605 | common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly | |
2606 | time so it has section @emph{undefined}. | |
2607 | ||
2608 | By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in | |
2609 | the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text | |
2610 | sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is | |
2611 | customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all | |
2612 | the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for | |
2613 | data and bss sections. | |
2614 | ||
2615 | Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for | |
a4fb0134 | 2616 | use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly. |
252b5132 RH |
2617 | |
2618 | @node Ld Sections | |
2619 | @section Linker Sections | |
2620 | @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below. | |
2621 | ||
2622 | @table @strong | |
2623 | ||
2624 | @ifset COFF | |
2625 | @cindex named sections | |
2626 | @cindex sections, named | |
2627 | @item named sections | |
2628 | @end ifset | |
2629 | @ifset aout-bout | |
2630 | @cindex text section | |
2631 | @cindex data section | |
2632 | @itemx text section | |
2633 | @itemx data section | |
2634 | @end ifset | |
a4fb0134 | 2635 | These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as |
252b5132 RH |
2636 | separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is |
2637 | true another. | |
2638 | @ifset aout-bout | |
2639 | When the program is running, however, it is | |
2640 | customary for the text section to be unalterable. The | |
2641 | text section is often shared among processes: it contains | |
2642 | instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running | |
2643 | program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored | |
2644 | in the data section. | |
2645 | @end ifset | |
2646 | ||
2647 | @cindex bss section | |
2648 | @item bss section | |
2649 | This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It | |
a349d9dd | 2650 | is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of |
252b5132 RH |
2651 | each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts |
2652 | out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero | |
2653 | bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate | |
2654 | those explicit zeros from object files. | |
2655 | ||
2656 | @cindex absolute section | |
2657 | @item absolute section | |
2658 | Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0. | |
2659 | This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must | |
2660 | not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute | |
2661 | addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation. | |
2662 | ||
2663 | @cindex undefined section | |
2664 | @item undefined section | |
2665 | This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in | |
2666 | the preceding sections. | |
2667 | @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here. | |
2668 | @end table | |
2669 | ||
2670 | @cindex relocation example | |
2671 | An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows. | |
2672 | @ifset COFF | |
2673 | The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}. | |
2674 | @end ifset | |
2675 | Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis. | |
2676 | ||
2677 | @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL | |
2678 | @ifinfo | |
2679 | @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL | |
2680 | @smallexample | |
2681 | +-----+----+--+ | |
2682 | partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00| | |
2683 | +-----+----+--+ | |
2684 | ||
2685 | text data bss | |
2686 | seg. seg. seg. | |
2687 | ||
2688 | +---+---+---+ | |
2689 | partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000| | |
2690 | +---+---+---+ | |
2691 | ||
2692 | +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~ | |
2693 | linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000| | |
2694 | +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~ | |
2695 | ||
2696 | addresses: 0 @dots{} | |
2697 | @end smallexample | |
2698 | @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL | |
2699 | @end ifinfo | |
2700 | @need 5000 | |
2701 | @tex | |
2702 | ||
2703 | \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil} | |
2704 | \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil} | |
2705 | \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil} | |
2706 | ||
2707 | \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil} | |
2708 | \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil} | |
2709 | \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil} | |
2710 | ||
2711 | \line{\it linked program: \hfil} | |
2712 | \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil} | |
2713 | \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt | |
2714 | ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt | |
2715 | DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil} | |
2716 | ||
2717 | \line{\it addresses: \hfil} | |
2718 | \line{0\dots\hfil} | |
2719 | ||
2720 | @end tex | |
2721 | @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL | |
2722 | ||
2723 | @node As Sections | |
2724 | @section Assembler Internal Sections | |
2725 | ||
2726 | @cindex internal assembler sections | |
2727 | @cindex sections in messages, internal | |
a4fb0134 | 2728 | These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They |
252b5132 | 2729 | have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these |
a4fb0134 | 2730 | sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}} |
252b5132 | 2731 | warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their |
a4fb0134 | 2732 | meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the |
252b5132 RH |
2733 | value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a |
2734 | section-relative address. | |
2735 | ||
2736 | @table @b | |
2737 | @cindex assembler internal logic error | |
2738 | @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR! | |
2739 | An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a | |
2740 | bug in the assembler. | |
2741 | ||
2742 | @cindex expr (internal section) | |
2743 | @item expr section | |
2744 | The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of | |
2745 | symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts | |
2746 | it in the expr section. | |
2747 | @c FIXME item debug | |
2748 | @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload | |
2749 | @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload | |
2750 | @c FIXME item register | |
2751 | @end table | |
2752 | ||
2753 | @node Sub-Sections | |
2754 | @section Sub-Sections | |
2755 | ||
2756 | @cindex numbered subsections | |
2757 | @cindex grouping data | |
2758 | @ifset aout-bout | |
2759 | Assembled bytes | |
2760 | @ifset COFF | |
2761 | conventionally | |
2762 | @end ifset | |
2763 | fall into two sections: text and data. | |
2764 | @end ifset | |
2765 | You may have separate groups of | |
2766 | @ifset GENERIC | |
2767 | data in named sections | |
2768 | @end ifset | |
2769 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
2770 | @ifclear aout-bout | |
2771 | data in named sections | |
2772 | @end ifclear | |
2773 | @ifset aout-bout | |
2774 | text or data | |
2775 | @end ifset | |
2776 | @end ifclear | |
2777 | that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they | |
a4fb0134 | 2778 | are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to |
252b5132 RH |
2779 | use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be |
2780 | numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the | |
2781 | same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same | |
2782 | subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text | |
2783 | section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being | |
2784 | assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each | |
2785 | section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of | |
2786 | constants being output. | |
2787 | ||
2788 | Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything | |
2789 | goes in subsection number zero. | |
2790 | ||
2791 | @ifset GENERIC | |
2792 | Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes. | |
2793 | (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors | |
a4fb0134 | 2794 | of @command{@value{AS}}.) |
252b5132 RH |
2795 | @end ifset |
2796 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
2797 | @ifset H8 | |
2798 | On the H8/300 and H8/500 platforms, each subsection is zero-padded to a word | |
2799 | boundary (two bytes). | |
2800 | The same is true on the Hitachi SH. | |
2801 | @end ifset | |
2802 | @ifset I960 | |
2803 | @c FIXME section padding (alignment)? | |
2804 | @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that | |
2805 | @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration, | |
2806 | @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue, | |
2807 | @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be | |
2808 | @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such). | |
2809 | @end ifset | |
2810 | @ifset A29K | |
2811 | On the AMD 29K family, no particular padding is added to section or | |
2812 | subsection sizes; @value{AS} forces no alignment on this platform. | |
2813 | @end ifset | |
2814 | @end ifclear | |
2815 | ||
2816 | Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered | |
2817 | to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.) | |
2818 | The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and | |
2819 | other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them. | |
2820 | They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your | |
2821 | data subsections as a data section. | |
2822 | ||
2823 | To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled | |
2824 | into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text | |
2825 | @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement. | |
2826 | @ifset COFF | |
2827 | @ifset GENERIC | |
2828 | When generating COFF output, you | |
2829 | @end ifset | |
2830 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
2831 | You | |
2832 | @end ifclear | |
2833 | can also use an extra subsection | |
2834 | argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name}, | |
2835 | @var{expression}}. | |
2836 | @end ifset | |
2837 | @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression. | |
2838 | (@xref{Expressions}.) If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0} | |
2839 | is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly | |
2840 | begins in @code{text 0}. For instance: | |
2841 | @smallexample | |
2842 | .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway. | |
2843 | .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *" | |
2844 | .text 1 | |
2845 | .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection." | |
2846 | .data 0 | |
2847 | .ascii "This lives in the data section," | |
2848 | .ascii "in the first data subsection." | |
2849 | .text 0 | |
2850 | .ascii "This lives in the first text section," | |
2851 | .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)." | |
2852 | @end smallexample | |
2853 | ||
2854 | Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte | |
2855 | assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience | |
a4fb0134 | 2856 | restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location |
252b5132 RH |
2857 | counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the |
2858 | @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its | |
2859 | current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being | |
2860 | assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter. | |
2861 | ||
2862 | @node bss | |
2863 | @section bss Section | |
2864 | ||
2865 | @cindex bss section | |
2866 | @cindex common variable storage | |
2867 | The bss section is used for local common variable storage. | |
2868 | You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may | |
2869 | not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When | |
2870 | your program starts running, all the contents of the bss | |
2871 | section are zeroed bytes. | |
2872 | ||
2873 | The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see | |
2874 | @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}. | |
2875 | ||
2876 | The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is | |
2877 | another form of uninitialized symbol; see @xref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}. | |
2878 | ||
2879 | @ifset GENERIC | |
2880 | When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or | |
2881 | COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual; | |
2882 | see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the | |
2883 | section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and | |
2884 | @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}). | |
2885 | @end ifset | |
2886 | ||
2887 | @node Symbols | |
2888 | @chapter Symbols | |
2889 | ||
2890 | @cindex symbols | |
2891 | Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name | |
2892 | things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols | |
2893 | to debug. | |
2894 | ||
2895 | @quotation | |
2896 | @cindex debuggers, and symbol order | |
a4fb0134 | 2897 | @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in |
252b5132 RH |
2898 | the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers. |
2899 | @end quotation | |
2900 | ||
2901 | @menu | |
2902 | * Labels:: Labels | |
2903 | * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values | |
2904 | * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names | |
2905 | * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol | |
2906 | * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes | |
2907 | @end menu | |
2908 | ||
2909 | @node Labels | |
2910 | @section Labels | |
2911 | ||
2912 | @cindex labels | |
2913 | A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon | |
2914 | @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the | |
2915 | active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction | |
2916 | operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two | |
2917 | different locations: the first definition overrides any other | |
2918 | definitions. | |
2919 | ||
2920 | @ifset HPPA | |
2921 | On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a | |
2922 | colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on | |
a4fb0134 | 2923 | a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also |
252b5132 RH |
2924 | provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly. |
2925 | @end ifset | |
2926 | ||
2927 | @node Setting Symbols | |
2928 | @section Giving Symbols Other Values | |
2929 | ||
2930 | @cindex assigning values to symbols | |
2931 | @cindex symbol values, assigning | |
2932 | A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed | |
2933 | by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression | |
2934 | (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set} | |
2935 | directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. | |
2936 | ||
2937 | @node Symbol Names | |
2938 | @section Symbol Names | |
2939 | ||
2940 | @cindex symbol names | |
2941 | @cindex names, symbol | |
2942 | @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS | |
2943 | Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most | |
2944 | machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are | |
2945 | noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any | |
2946 | string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted in | |
2947 | @ref{Machine Dependencies}), and underscores. | |
2948 | @end ifclear | |
2949 | @ifset A29K | |
2950 | For the AMD 29K family, @samp{?} is also allowed in the | |
2951 | body of a symbol name, though not at its beginning. | |
2952 | @end ifset | |
2953 | ||
2954 | @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS | |
2955 | @ifset H8 | |
2956 | Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the | |
2957 | Hitachi SH or the | |
2958 | H8/500, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That character may | |
2959 | be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save on the | |
2960 | H8/300), and underscores. | |
2961 | @end ifset | |
2962 | @end ifset | |
2963 | ||
2964 | Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name | |
2965 | than @code{Foo}. | |
2966 | ||
2967 | Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program | |
2968 | refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times | |
2969 | in a program. | |
2970 | ||
2971 | @subheading Local Symbol Names | |
2972 | ||
2973 | @cindex local symbol names | |
2974 | @cindex symbol names, local | |
2975 | @cindex temporary symbol names | |
2976 | @cindex symbol names, temporary | |
2977 | Local symbols help compilers and programmers use names temporarily. | |
2d5aaba0 NC |
2978 | They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of |
2979 | the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation. | |
2980 | To define a local symbol, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} | |
2981 | represents any positive integer). To refer to the most recent previous | |
2982 | definition of that symbol write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when | |
2983 | you defined the label. To refer to the next definition of a local label, write | |
2984 | @samp{@b{N}f}--- The @samp{b} stands for``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands | |
2985 | for ``forwards''. | |
2986 | ||
2987 | There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them | |
2988 | too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using | |
2989 | the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently | |
2990 | defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next | |
2991 | definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth | |
2992 | noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are | |
2993 | implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others. | |
2994 | ||
2995 | Here is an example: | |
2996 | ||
2997 | @smallexample | |
2998 | 1: branch 1f | |
2999 | 2: branch 1b | |
3000 | 1: branch 2f | |
3001 | 2: branch 1b | |
3002 | @end smallexample | |
3003 | ||
3004 | Which is the equivalent of: | |
3005 | ||
3006 | @smallexample | |
3007 | label_1: branch label_3 | |
3008 | label_2: branch label_1 | |
3009 | label_3: branch label_4 | |
3010 | label_4: branch label_3 | |
3011 | @end smallexample | |
3012 | ||
3013 | Local symbol names are only a notational device. They are immediately | |
3014 | transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them. | |
3015 | The symbol names stored in the symbol table, appearing in error messages and | |
3016 | optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using these | |
252b5132 RH |
3017 | parts: |
3018 | ||
3019 | @table @code | |
3020 | @item L | |
a4fb0134 | 3021 | All local labels begin with @samp{L}. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and |
252b5132 RH |
3022 | @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols that start with @samp{L}. These labels are |
3023 | used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the | |
a4fb0134 | 3024 | @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the |
252b5132 RH |
3025 | object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols, |
3026 | you may use them in debugging. | |
3027 | ||
2d5aaba0 NC |
3028 | @item @var{number} |
3029 | This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the | |
3030 | label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}. | |
252b5132 | 3031 | |
2d5aaba0 NC |
3032 | @item @kbd{C-B} |
3033 | This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol | |
3034 | of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B). | |
252b5132 RH |
3035 | |
3036 | @item @emph{ordinal number} | |
2d5aaba0 NC |
3037 | This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of |
3038 | @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the | |
3039 | number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets | |
3040 | the number @samp{1} and its 15th defintion gets @samp{15} as well. | |
252b5132 RH |
3041 | @end table |
3042 | ||
2d5aaba0 NC |
3043 | So for example, the first @code{1:} is named @code{L1@kbd{C-B}1}, the 44th |
3044 | @code{3:} is named @code{L3@kbd{C-B}44}. | |
3045 | ||
3046 | @subheading Dollar Local Labels | |
3047 | @cindex dollar local symbols | |
3048 | ||
3049 | @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called | |
3050 | dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (ie they become undefined) as soon | |
3051 | as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain valid for only a small | |
3052 | region of the input source code. Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in | |
3053 | scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of | |
3054 | the same local label. | |
3055 | ||
3056 | Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels, | |
3057 | except that instead of being terminated by a colon, they are terminated by a | |
3058 | dollar sign. eg @samp{@b{55$}}. | |
3059 | ||
3060 | They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed | |
3061 | name which uses ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character | |
3062 | to distinguish them from ordinary labels. Thus the 5th defintion of @samp{6$} | |
3063 | is named @samp{L6@kbd{C-A}5}. | |
252b5132 RH |
3064 | |
3065 | @node Dot | |
3066 | @section The Special Dot Symbol | |
3067 | ||
3068 | @cindex dot (symbol) | |
3069 | @cindex @code{.} (symbol) | |
3070 | @cindex current address | |
3071 | @cindex location counter | |
3072 | The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that | |
a4fb0134 | 3073 | @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin: |
252b5132 RH |
3074 | .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address. |
3075 | Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org} | |
3076 | directive. Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying | |
3077 | @ifclear no-space-dir | |
3078 | @samp{.space 4}. | |
3079 | @end ifclear | |
3080 | @ifset no-space-dir | |
3081 | @ifset A29K | |
3082 | @samp{.block 4}. | |
3083 | @end ifset | |
3084 | @end ifset | |
3085 | ||
3086 | @node Symbol Attributes | |
3087 | @section Symbol Attributes | |
3088 | ||
3089 | @cindex symbol attributes | |
3090 | @cindex attributes, symbol | |
3091 | Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and | |
3092 | ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary | |
3093 | attributes. | |
3094 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
3095 | The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}. | |
3096 | @end ifset | |
3097 | ||
a4fb0134 | 3098 | If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for |
252b5132 RH |
3099 | all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the |
3100 | symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you | |
3101 | would want. | |
3102 | ||
3103 | @menu | |
3104 | * Symbol Value:: Value | |
3105 | * Symbol Type:: Type | |
3106 | @ifset aout-bout | |
3107 | @ifset GENERIC | |
3108 | * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out} | |
3109 | @end ifset | |
3110 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
3111 | @ifclear BOUT | |
3112 | * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out} | |
3113 | @end ifclear | |
3114 | @ifset BOUT | |
3115 | * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out} | |
3116 | @end ifset | |
3117 | @end ifclear | |
3118 | @end ifset | |
3119 | @ifset COFF | |
3120 | * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF | |
3121 | @end ifset | |
3122 | @ifset SOM | |
3123 | * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM | |
3124 | @end ifset | |
3125 | @end menu | |
3126 | ||
3127 | @node Symbol Value | |
3128 | @subsection Value | |
3129 | ||
3130 | @cindex value of a symbol | |
3131 | @cindex symbol value | |
3132 | The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a | |
3133 | location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the | |
3134 | number of addresses from the start of that section to the label. | |
3135 | Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes | |
3136 | as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute | |
3137 | symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are | |
3138 | called absolute. | |
3139 | ||
3140 | The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is | |
3141 | 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and | |
3142 | @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the | |
3143 | same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol | |
3144 | name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm} | |
3145 | common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in | |
3146 | bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the | |
3147 | allocated storage. | |
3148 | ||
3149 | @node Symbol Type | |
3150 | @subsection Type | |
3151 | ||
3152 | @cindex type of a symbol | |
3153 | @cindex symbol type | |
3154 | The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section) | |
3155 | information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and | |
3156 | (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact | |
3157 | format depends on the object-code output format in use. | |
3158 | ||
3159 | @ifset aout-bout | |
3160 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
3161 | @ifset BOUT | |
3162 | @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be | |
3163 | @c better if it were available outside examples. | |
3164 | @need 1000 | |
3165 | @node a.out Symbols | |
3166 | @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out} | |
3167 | ||
3168 | @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes | |
3169 | @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out} | |
a4fb0134 | 3170 | These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for |
252b5132 RH |
3171 | one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or |
3172 | @code{b.out}. | |
3173 | ||
3174 | @end ifset | |
3175 | @ifclear BOUT | |
3176 | @node a.out Symbols | |
3177 | @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out} | |
3178 | ||
3179 | @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes | |
3180 | @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out} | |
3181 | ||
3182 | @end ifclear | |
3183 | @end ifclear | |
3184 | @ifset GENERIC | |
3185 | @node a.out Symbols | |
3186 | @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out} | |
3187 | ||
3188 | @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes | |
3189 | @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out} | |
3190 | ||
3191 | @end ifset | |
3192 | @menu | |
3193 | * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor | |
3194 | * Symbol Other:: Other | |
3195 | @end menu | |
3196 | ||
3197 | @node Symbol Desc | |
3198 | @subsubsection Descriptor | |
3199 | ||
3200 | @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol | |
3201 | This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's | |
3202 | descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement | |
3203 | (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to | |
a4fb0134 | 3204 | @command{@value{AS}}. |
252b5132 RH |
3205 | |
3206 | @node Symbol Other | |
3207 | @subsubsection Other | |
3208 | ||
3209 | @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol | |
a4fb0134 | 3210 | This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}. |
252b5132 RH |
3211 | @end ifset |
3212 | ||
3213 | @ifset COFF | |
3214 | @node COFF Symbols | |
3215 | @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF | |
3216 | ||
3217 | @cindex COFF symbol attributes | |
3218 | @cindex symbol attributes, COFF | |
3219 | ||
3220 | The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes; | |
3221 | like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and | |
3222 | @code{.endef} directives. | |
3223 | ||
3224 | @subsubsection Primary Attributes | |
3225 | ||
3226 | @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols | |
3227 | The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type, | |
3228 | respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}. | |
3229 | ||
3230 | @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes | |
3231 | ||
3232 | @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols | |
a4fb0134 | 3233 | The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl}, |
252b5132 RH |
3234 | @code{.size}, and @code{.tag} can generate auxiliary symbol table |
3235 | information for COFF. | |
3236 | @end ifset | |
3237 | ||
3238 | @ifset SOM | |
3239 | @node SOM Symbols | |
3240 | @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM | |
3241 | ||
3242 | @cindex SOM symbol attributes | |
3243 | @cindex symbol attributes, SOM | |
3244 | ||
3245 | The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with | |
3246 | the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives. | |
3247 | ||
3248 | The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly | |
3249 | Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and | |
3250 | @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation. | |
3251 | @end ifset | |
3252 | ||
3253 | @node Expressions | |
3254 | @chapter Expressions | |
3255 | ||
3256 | @cindex expressions | |
3257 | @cindex addresses | |
3258 | @cindex numeric values | |
3259 | An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value. | |
3260 | Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression. | |
3261 | ||
3262 | The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into | |
3263 | a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not | |
a4fb0134 | 3264 | enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its |
252b5132 RH |
3265 | section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret |
3266 | the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented. | |
a4fb0134 | 3267 | @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation. |
252b5132 RH |
3268 | |
3269 | @menu | |
3270 | * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions | |
3271 | * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions | |
3272 | @end menu | |
3273 | ||
3274 | @node Empty Exprs | |
3275 | @section Empty Expressions | |
3276 | ||
3277 | @cindex empty expressions | |
3278 | @cindex expressions, empty | |
3279 | An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null. | |
3280 | Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the | |
a4fb0134 | 3281 | expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This |
252b5132 RH |
3282 | is compatible with other assemblers. |
3283 | ||
3284 | @node Integer Exprs | |
3285 | @section Integer Expressions | |
3286 | ||
3287 | @cindex integer expressions | |
3288 | @cindex expressions, integer | |
3289 | An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited | |
3290 | by @emph{operators}. | |
3291 | ||
3292 | @menu | |
3293 | * Arguments:: Arguments | |
3294 | * Operators:: Operators | |
3295 | * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators | |
3296 | * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators | |
3297 | @end menu | |
3298 | ||
3299 | @node Arguments | |
3300 | @subsection Arguments | |
3301 | ||
3302 | @cindex expression arguments | |
3303 | @cindex arguments in expressions | |
3304 | @cindex operands in expressions | |
3305 | @cindex arithmetic operands | |
3306 | @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other | |
3307 | contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In | |
3308 | this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of | |
3309 | the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of | |
3310 | expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine | |
3311 | instruction operands. | |
3312 | ||
3313 | Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where | |
3314 | @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute, | |
3315 | or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit | |
3316 | integer. | |
3317 | ||
3318 | Numbers are usually integers. | |
3319 | ||
3320 | A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned | |
a4fb0134 | 3321 | that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends |
252b5132 RH |
3322 | these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating |
3323 | instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other | |
3324 | assemblers. | |
3325 | ||
3326 | @cindex subexpressions | |
3327 | Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer | |
3328 | expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix | |
3329 | operator followed by an argument. | |
3330 | ||
3331 | @node Operators | |
3332 | @subsection Operators | |
3333 | ||
3334 | @cindex operators, in expressions | |
3335 | @cindex arithmetic functions | |
3336 | @cindex functions, in expressions | |
3337 | @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix | |
3338 | operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear | |
3339 | between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by | |
3340 | whitespace. | |
3341 | ||
3342 | @node Prefix Ops | |
3343 | @subsection Prefix Operator | |
3344 | ||
3345 | @cindex prefix operators | |
a4fb0134 | 3346 | @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take |
252b5132 RH |
3347 | one argument, which must be absolute. |
3348 | ||
3349 | @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make | |
3350 | @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next | |
3351 | @c section (which is inside an enumerate). | |
3352 | @tex | |
3353 | \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent | |
3354 | @end tex | |
3355 | ||
3356 | @table @code | |
3357 | @item - | |
3358 | @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation. | |
3359 | @item ~ | |
3360 | @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not. | |
3361 | @end table | |
3362 | ||
3363 | @tex | |
3364 | \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent | |
3365 | @end tex | |
3366 | ||
3367 | @node Infix Ops | |
3368 | @subsection Infix Operators | |
3369 | ||
3370 | @cindex infix operators | |
3371 | @cindex operators, permitted arguments | |
3372 | @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators | |
3373 | have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left | |
a4fb0134 | 3374 | to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be |
252b5132 RH |
3375 | absolute, and the result is absolute. |
3376 | ||
3377 | @enumerate | |
3378 | @cindex operator precedence | |
3379 | @cindex precedence of operators | |
3380 | ||
3381 | @item | |
3382 | Highest Precedence | |
3383 | ||
3384 | @table @code | |
3385 | @item * | |
3386 | @dfn{Multiplication}. | |
3387 | ||
3388 | @item / | |
3389 | @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/} | |
3390 | ||
3391 | @item % | |
3392 | @dfn{Remainder}. | |
3393 | ||
3394 | @item < | |
3395 | @itemx << | |
3396 | @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}. | |
3397 | ||
3398 | @item > | |
3399 | @itemx >> | |
3400 | @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}. | |
3401 | @end table | |
3402 | ||
3403 | @item | |
3404 | Intermediate precedence | |
3405 | ||
3406 | @table @code | |
3407 | @item | | |
3408 | ||
3409 | @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}. | |
3410 | ||
3411 | @item & | |
3412 | @dfn{Bitwise And}. | |
3413 | ||
3414 | @item ^ | |
3415 | @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}. | |
3416 | ||
3417 | @item ! | |
3418 | @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}. | |
3419 | @end table | |
3420 | ||
3421 | @item | |
b131d4dc | 3422 | Low Precedence |
252b5132 RH |
3423 | |
3424 | @table @code | |
3425 | @cindex addition, permitted arguments | |
3426 | @cindex plus, permitted arguments | |
3427 | @cindex arguments for addition | |
3428 | @item + | |
3429 | @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of | |
3430 | the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different | |
3431 | sections. | |
3432 | ||
3433 | @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments | |
3434 | @cindex minus, permitted arguments | |
3435 | @cindex arguments for subtraction | |
3436 | @item - | |
3437 | @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the | |
3438 | result has the section of the left argument. | |
3439 | If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute. | |
3440 | You may not subtract arguments from different sections. | |
3441 | @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ? | |
b131d4dc NC |
3442 | |
3443 | @cindex comparison expressions | |
3444 | @cindex expressions, comparison | |
3445 | @item == | |
3446 | @dfn{Is Equal To} | |
3447 | @item <> | |
3448 | @dfn{Is Not Equal To} | |
3449 | @item < | |
3450 | @dfn{Is Less Than} | |
3451 | @itemx > | |
3452 | @dfn{Is Greater Than} | |
3453 | @itemx >= | |
3454 | @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To} | |
3455 | @itemx <= | |
3456 | @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To} | |
3457 | ||
3458 | The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a | |
3459 | value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators | |
3460 | perform signed comparisons. | |
3461 | @end table | |
3462 | ||
3463 | @item Lowest Precedence | |
3464 | ||
3465 | @table @code | |
3466 | @item && | |
3467 | @dfn{Logical And}. | |
3468 | ||
3469 | @item || | |
3470 | @dfn{Logical Or}. | |
3471 | ||
3472 | These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub | |
3473 | expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a | |
3474 | value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical | |
3475 | or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and. | |
3476 | ||
252b5132 RH |
3477 | @end table |
3478 | @end enumerate | |
3479 | ||
3480 | In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an | |
3481 | address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments. | |
3482 | ||
3483 | @node Pseudo Ops | |
3484 | @chapter Assembler Directives | |
3485 | ||
3486 | @cindex directives, machine independent | |
3487 | @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent | |
3488 | @cindex machine independent directives | |
3489 | All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}). | |
3490 | The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case. | |
3491 | ||
3492 | This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the | |
3493 | target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler. | |
3494 | @ifset GENERIC | |
3495 | Some machine configurations provide additional directives. | |
3496 | @xref{Machine Dependencies}. | |
3497 | @end ifset | |
3498 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
3499 | @ifset machine-directives | |
3500 | @xref{Machine Dependencies} for additional directives. | |
3501 | @end ifset | |
3502 | @end ifclear | |
3503 | ||
3504 | @menu | |
3505 | * Abort:: @code{.abort} | |
3506 | @ifset COFF | |
3507 | * ABORT:: @code{.ABORT} | |
3508 | @end ifset | |
f0dc282c | 3509 | |
252b5132 RH |
3510 | * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}} |
3511 | * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{} | |
3512 | * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{} | |
3513 | * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}} | |
3514 | * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}} | |
3515 | * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} } | |
3516 | * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}} | |
3517 | @ifset COFF | |
3518 | * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}} | |
3519 | @end ifset | |
3520 | @ifset aout-bout | |
3521 | * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}} | |
3522 | @end ifset | |
3523 | @ifset COFF | |
3524 | * Dim:: @code{.dim} | |
3525 | @end ifset | |
f0dc282c | 3526 | |
252b5132 RH |
3527 | * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}} |
3528 | * Eject:: @code{.eject} | |
3529 | * Else:: @code{.else} | |
3fd9f047 | 3530 | * Elseif:: @code{.elseif} |
252b5132 RH |
3531 | * End:: @code{.end} |
3532 | @ifset COFF | |
3533 | * Endef:: @code{.endef} | |
3534 | @end ifset | |
f0dc282c | 3535 | |
252b5132 RH |
3536 | * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc} |
3537 | * Endif:: @code{.endif} | |
3538 | * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} | |
3539 | * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} | |
3540 | * Err:: @code{.err} | |
3541 | * Exitm:: @code{.exitm} | |
3542 | * Extern:: @code{.extern} | |
3543 | * Fail:: @code{.fail} | |
3544 | @ifclear no-file-dir | |
3545 | * File:: @code{.file @var{string}} | |
3546 | @end ifclear | |
f0dc282c | 3547 | |
252b5132 RH |
3548 | * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}} |
3549 | * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}} | |
3550 | * Func:: @code{.func} | |
3551 | * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}} | |
c91d2e08 NC |
3552 | @ifset ELF |
3553 | * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}} | |
3554 | @end ifset | |
f0dc282c | 3555 | |
252b5132 RH |
3556 | * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}} |
3557 | * Ident:: @code{.ident} | |
3558 | * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}} | |
7e005732 | 3559 | * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]} |
252b5132 RH |
3560 | * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"} |
3561 | * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}} | |
c91d2e08 NC |
3562 | @ifset ELF |
3563 | * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}} | |
3564 | @end ifset | |
f0dc282c | 3565 | |
252b5132 RH |
3566 | * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{} |
3567 | * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{} | |
3568 | * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}} | |
3569 | * Lflags:: @code{.lflags} | |
3570 | @ifclear no-line-dir | |
3571 | * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}} | |
3572 | @end ifclear | |
f0dc282c | 3573 | |
252b5132 RH |
3574 | * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}} |
3575 | * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]} | |
3576 | * List:: @code{.list} | |
3577 | * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}} | |
3578 | @ignore | |
3579 | * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} | |
3580 | @end ignore | |
f0dc282c | 3581 | |
252b5132 RH |
3582 | * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{} |
3583 | * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}} | |
252b5132 RH |
3584 | * Nolist:: @code{.nolist} |
3585 | * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}} | |
3586 | * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}} | |
3587 | * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}} | |
c91d2e08 NC |
3588 | @ifset ELF |
3589 | * PopSection:: @code{.popsection} | |
3590 | * Previous:: @code{.previous} | |
3591 | @end ifset | |
f0dc282c | 3592 | |
252b5132 | 3593 | * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}} |
c91d2e08 NC |
3594 | @ifset ELF |
3595 | * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}} | |
3596 | @end ifset | |
f0dc282c | 3597 | |
252b5132 RH |
3598 | * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}} |
3599 | * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}} | |
c91d2e08 NC |
3600 | @ifset ELF |
3601 | * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}} | |
3602 | @end ifset | |
f0dc282c | 3603 | |
252b5132 RH |
3604 | * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}} |
3605 | * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}} | |
3606 | * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"} | |
3607 | @ifset COFF | |
3608 | * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}} | |
3609 | * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}, @var{subsection}} | |
3610 | @end ifset | |
f0dc282c | 3611 | |
252b5132 RH |
3612 | * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} |
3613 | * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}} | |
3614 | * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}} | |
c91d2e08 | 3615 | * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]} |
252b5132 RH |
3616 | * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}} |
3617 | * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}} | |
3618 | * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}} | |
3619 | @ifset have-stabs | |
3620 | * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs} | |
3621 | @end ifset | |
f0dc282c | 3622 | |
252b5132 RH |
3623 | * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"} |
3624 | * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}} | |
3625 | @ifset ELF | |
c91d2e08 | 3626 | * SubSection:: @code{.subsection} |
252b5132 RH |
3627 | * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}} |
3628 | @end ifset | |
f0dc282c | 3629 | |
252b5132 RH |
3630 | @ifset COFF |
3631 | * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}} | |
3632 | @end ifset | |
f0dc282c | 3633 | |
252b5132 RH |
3634 | * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}} |
3635 | * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"} | |
c91d2e08 NC |
3636 | * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>} |
3637 | * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}} | |
252b5132 | 3638 | @ifset COFF |
252b5132 RH |
3639 | * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}} |
3640 | @end ifset | |
f0dc282c | 3641 | |
2e13b764 | 3642 | @ifset ELF |
c91d2e08 | 3643 | * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"} |
c91d2e08 NC |
3644 | * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}} |
3645 | * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}} | |
c91d2e08 | 3646 | * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}} |
2e13b764 | 3647 | @end ifset |
f0dc282c | 3648 | |
252b5132 RH |
3649 | * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}} |
3650 | * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives | |
3651 | @end menu | |
3652 | ||
3653 | @node Abort | |
3654 | @section @code{.abort} | |
3655 | ||
3656 | @cindex @code{abort} directive | |
3657 | @cindex stopping the assembly | |
3658 | This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for | |
3659 | compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the | |
3660 | assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender | |
a4fb0134 | 3661 | of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to |
252b5132 RH |
3662 | quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported. |
3663 | ||
3664 | @ifset COFF | |
3665 | @node ABORT | |
3666 | @section @code{.ABORT} | |
3667 | ||
3668 | @cindex @code{ABORT} directive | |
a4fb0134 | 3669 | When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a |
252b5132 RH |
3670 | synonym for @samp{.abort}. |
3671 | ||
3672 | @ifset BOUT | |
a4fb0134 | 3673 | When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, |
252b5132 RH |
3674 | but ignores it. |
3675 | @end ifset | |
3676 | @end ifset | |
3677 | ||
3678 | @node Align | |
3679 | @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}} | |
3680 | ||
3681 | @cindex padding the location counter | |
3682 | @cindex @code{align} directive | |
3683 | Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage | |
3684 | boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment | |
3685 | required, as described below. | |
3686 | ||
3687 | The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the | |
3688 | padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the | |
3689 | padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is | |
3690 | marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled | |
3691 | with no-op instructions. | |
3692 | ||
3693 | The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present, | |
3694 | it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment | |
3695 | directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the | |
3696 | specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the | |
3697 | fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the | |
3698 | required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled | |
3699 | with no-op instructions when appropriate. | |
3700 | ||
3701 | The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system. | |
3702 | For the a29k, hppa, m68k, m88k, w65, sparc, and Hitachi SH, and i386 using ELF | |
3703 | format, | |
3704 | the first expression is the | |
3705 | alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances | |
3706 | the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter | |
3707 | is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. | |
3708 | ||
adcf07e6 NC |
3709 | For other systems, including the i386 using a.out format, and the arm and |
3710 | strongarm, it is the | |
252b5132 RH |
3711 | number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after |
3712 | advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location | |
3713 | counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a | |
3714 | multiple of 8, no change is needed. | |
3715 | ||
3716 | This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various | |
3717 | native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate. | |
3718 | GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives, | |
3719 | described later, which have a consistent behavior across all | |
3720 | architectures (but are specific to GAS). | |
3721 | ||
3722 | @node Ascii | |
3723 | @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{} | |
3724 | ||
3725 | @cindex @code{ascii} directive | |
3726 | @cindex string literals | |
3727 | @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings}) | |
3728 | separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic | |
3729 | trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses. | |
3730 | ||
3731 | @node Asciz | |
3732 | @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{} | |
3733 | ||
3734 | @cindex @code{asciz} directive | |
3735 | @cindex zero-terminated strings | |
3736 | @cindex null-terminated strings | |
3737 | @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by | |
3738 | a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''. | |
3739 | ||
3740 | @node Balign | |
3741 | @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}} | |
3742 | ||
3743 | @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes | |
3744 | @cindex @code{balign} directive | |
3745 | Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular | |
3746 | storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the | |
3747 | alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances | |
3748 | the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter | |
3749 | is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. | |
3750 | ||
3751 | The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the | |
3752 | padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the | |
3753 | padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is | |
3754 | marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled | |
3755 | with no-op instructions. | |
3756 | ||
3757 | The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present, | |
3758 | it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment | |
3759 | directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the | |
3760 | specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the | |
3761 | fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the | |
3762 | required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled | |
3763 | with no-op instructions when appropriate. | |
3764 | ||
3765 | @cindex @code{balignw} directive | |
3766 | @cindex @code{balignl} directive | |
3767 | The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the | |
3768 | @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill | |
3769 | pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the | |
3770 | fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw | |
3771 | 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be | |
3772 | filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon | |
3773 | the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is | |
3774 | undefined. | |
3775 | ||
3776 | @node Byte | |
3777 | @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}} | |
3778 | ||
3779 | @cindex @code{byte} directive | |
3780 | @cindex integers, one byte | |
3781 | @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas. | |
3782 | Each expression is assembled into the next byte. | |
3783 | ||
3784 | @node Comm | |
3785 | @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} } | |
3786 | ||
3787 | @cindex @code{comm} directive | |
3788 | @cindex symbol, common | |
3789 | @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a | |
3790 | common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol | |
3791 | of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a | |
3792 | definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will | |
3793 | allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an | |
3794 | absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with | |
3795 | the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space | |
3796 | using the largest size. | |
3797 | ||
3798 | @ifset ELF | |
3799 | When using ELF, the @code{.comm} directive takes an optional third argument. | |
3800 | This is the desired alignment of the symbol, specified as a byte boundary (for | |
3801 | example, an alignment of 16 means that the least significant 4 bits of the | |
3802 | address should be zero). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it | |
3803 | must be a power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory | |
3804 | for the common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If | |
a4fb0134 | 3805 | no alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the |
252b5132 RH |
3806 | largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a |
3807 | maximum of 16. | |
3808 | @end ifset | |
3809 | ||
3810 | @ifset HPPA | |
3811 | The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is | |
3812 | @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional. | |
3813 | @end ifset | |
3814 | ||
3815 | @node Data | |
3816 | @section @code{.data @var{subsection}} | |
3817 | ||
3818 | @cindex @code{data} directive | |
a4fb0134 | 3819 | @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the |
252b5132 RH |
3820 | end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an |
3821 | absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults | |
3822 | to zero. | |
3823 | ||
3824 | @ifset COFF | |
3825 | @node Def | |
3826 | @section @code{.def @var{name}} | |
3827 | ||
3828 | @cindex @code{def} directive | |
3829 | @cindex COFF symbols, debugging | |
3830 | @cindex debugging COFF symbols | |
3831 | Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the | |
3832 | definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered. | |
3833 | @ifset BOUT | |
3834 | ||
a4fb0134 | 3835 | This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF |
252b5132 RH |
3836 | format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized, |
3837 | but ignored. | |
3838 | @end ifset | |
3839 | @end ifset | |
3840 | ||
3841 | @ifset aout-bout | |
3842 | @node Desc | |
3843 | @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}} | |
3844 | ||
3845 | @cindex @code{desc} directive | |
3846 | @cindex COFF symbol descriptor | |
3847 | @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF | |
3848 | This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}) | |
3849 | to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression. | |
3850 | ||
3851 | @ifset COFF | |
a4fb0134 | 3852 | The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is |
252b5132 | 3853 | configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out} |
a4fb0134 | 3854 | object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts |
252b5132 RH |
3855 | it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF. |
3856 | @end ifset | |
3857 | @end ifset | |
3858 | ||
3859 | @ifset COFF | |
3860 | @node Dim | |
3861 | @section @code{.dim} | |
3862 | ||
3863 | @cindex @code{dim} directive | |
3864 | @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information | |
3865 | @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF | |
3866 | This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging | |
3867 | information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside | |
3868 | @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. | |
3869 | @ifset BOUT | |
3870 | ||
3871 | @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when | |
a4fb0134 | 3872 | @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but |
252b5132 RH |
3873 | ignores it. |
3874 | @end ifset | |
3875 | @end ifset | |
3876 | ||
3877 | @node Double | |
3878 | @section @code{.double @var{flonums}} | |
3879 | ||
3880 | @cindex @code{double} directive | |
3881 | @cindex floating point numbers (double) | |
3882 | @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It | |
3883 | assembles floating point numbers. | |
3884 | @ifset GENERIC | |
3885 | The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how | |
a4fb0134 | 3886 | @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}. |
252b5132 RH |
3887 | @end ifset |
3888 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
3889 | @ifset IEEEFLOAT | |
3890 | On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers | |
3891 | in @sc{ieee} format. | |
3892 | @end ifset | |
3893 | @end ifclear | |
3894 | ||
3895 | @node Eject | |
3896 | @section @code{.eject} | |
3897 | ||
3898 | @cindex @code{eject} directive | |
3899 | @cindex new page, in listings | |
3900 | @cindex page, in listings | |
3901 | @cindex listing control: new page | |
3902 | Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings. | |
3903 | ||
3904 | @node Else | |
3905 | @section @code{.else} | |
3906 | ||
3907 | @cindex @code{else} directive | |
a4fb0134 | 3908 | @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional |
252b5132 RH |
3909 | assembly; @pxref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section |
3910 | of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if} | |
3911 | was false. | |
3912 | ||
3fd9f047 TW |
3913 | @node Elseif |
3914 | @section @code{.elseif} | |
3915 | ||
3916 | @cindex @code{elseif} directive | |
a4fb0134 | 3917 | @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional |
3fd9f047 TW |
3918 | assembly; @pxref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new |
3919 | @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section. | |
3920 | ||
252b5132 RH |
3921 | @node End |
3922 | @section @code{.end} | |
3923 | ||
3924 | @cindex @code{end} directive | |
a4fb0134 | 3925 | @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not |
252b5132 RH |
3926 | process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive. |
3927 | ||
3928 | @ifset COFF | |
3929 | @node Endef | |
3930 | @section @code{.endef} | |
3931 | ||
3932 | @cindex @code{endef} directive | |
3933 | This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with | |
3934 | @code{.def}. | |
3935 | @ifset BOUT | |
3936 | ||
3937 | @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if | |
a4fb0134 | 3938 | @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this |
252b5132 RH |
3939 | directive but ignores it. |
3940 | @end ifset | |
3941 | @end ifset | |
3942 | ||
3943 | @node Endfunc | |
3944 | @section @code{.endfunc} | |
3945 | @cindex @code{endfunc} directive | |
3946 | @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}. | |
3947 | ||
3948 | @node Endif | |
3949 | @section @code{.endif} | |
3950 | ||
3951 | @cindex @code{endif} directive | |
a4fb0134 | 3952 | @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly; |
252b5132 RH |
3953 | it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled |
3954 | conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}. | |
3955 | ||
3956 | @node Equ | |
3957 | @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} | |
3958 | ||
3959 | @cindex @code{equ} directive | |
3960 | @cindex assigning values to symbols | |
3961 | @cindex symbols, assigning values to | |
3962 | This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. | |
3963 | It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; @pxref{Set,,@code{.set}}. | |
3964 | ||
3965 | @ifset HPPA | |
3966 | The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is | |
3967 | @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}. | |
3968 | @end ifset | |
3969 | ||
3970 | @node Equiv | |
3971 | @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} | |
3972 | @cindex @code{equiv} directive | |
3973 | The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that | |
3974 | the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. | |
3975 | ||
3976 | Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to | |
3977 | @smallexample | |
3978 | .ifdef SYM | |
3979 | .err | |
3980 | .endif | |
3981 | .equ SYM,VAL | |
3982 | @end smallexample | |
3983 | ||
3984 | @node Err | |
3985 | @section @code{.err} | |
3986 | @cindex @code{err} directive | |
a4fb0134 SC |
3987 | If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error |
3988 | message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an | |
252b5132 RH |
3989 | object file. This can be used to signal error an conditionally compiled code. |
3990 | ||
3991 | @node Exitm | |
3992 | @section @code{.exitm} | |
3993 | Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}. | |
3994 | ||
3995 | @node Extern | |
3996 | @section @code{.extern} | |
3997 | ||
3998 | @cindex @code{extern} directive | |
3999 | @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility | |
a4fb0134 | 4000 | with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats |
252b5132 RH |
4001 | all undefined symbols as external. |
4002 | ||
4003 | @node Fail | |
4004 | @section @code{.fail @var{expression}} | |
4005 | ||
4006 | @cindex @code{fail} directive | |
4007 | Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500 | |
a4fb0134 SC |
4008 | or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less |
4009 | than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will | |
252b5132 RH |
4010 | include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside |
4011 | complex nested macros or conditional assembly. | |
4012 | ||
4013 | @ifclear no-file-dir | |
4014 | @node File | |
4015 | @section @code{.file @var{string}} | |
4016 | ||
4017 | @cindex @code{file} directive | |
4018 | @cindex logical file name | |
4019 | @cindex file name, logical | |
a4fb0134 | 4020 | @code{.file} tells @command{@value{AS}} that we are about to start a new logical |
252b5132 RH |
4021 | file. @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is |
4022 | recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish | |
4023 | to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This | |
4024 | statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with | |
a4fb0134 | 4025 | old @command{@value{AS}} programs. |
252b5132 | 4026 | @ifset A29K |
a4fb0134 | 4027 | In some configurations of @command{@value{AS}}, @code{.file} has already been |
252b5132 RH |
4028 | removed to avoid conflicts with other assemblers. @xref{Machine Dependencies}. |
4029 | @end ifset | |
4030 | @end ifclear | |
4031 | ||
4032 | @node Fill | |
4033 | @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}} | |
4034 | ||
4035 | @cindex @code{fill} directive | |
4036 | @cindex writing patterns in memory | |
4037 | @cindex patterns, writing in memory | |
bc64be0c | 4038 | @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions. |
252b5132 RH |
4039 | This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat} |
4040 | may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is | |
4041 | more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with | |
4042 | other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes | |
4043 | is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are | |
4044 | zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the | |
a4fb0134 | 4045 | byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for. |
252b5132 RH |
4046 | Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order |
4047 | @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is | |
4048 | compatible with other people's assemblers. | |
4049 | ||
4050 | @var{size} and @var{value} are optional. | |
4051 | If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is | |
4052 | assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent, | |
4053 | @var{size} is assumed to be 1. | |
4054 | ||
4055 | @node Float | |
4056 | @section @code{.float @var{flonums}} | |
4057 | ||
4058 | @cindex floating point numbers (single) | |
4059 | @cindex @code{float} directive | |
4060 | This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It | |
4061 | has the same effect as @code{.single}. | |
4062 | @ifset GENERIC | |
4063 | The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how | |
a4fb0134 | 4064 | @command{@value{AS}} is configured. |
252b5132 RH |
4065 | @xref{Machine Dependencies}. |
4066 | @end ifset | |
4067 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
4068 | @ifset IEEEFLOAT | |
4069 | On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers | |
4070 | in @sc{ieee} format. | |
4071 | @end ifset | |
4072 | @end ifclear | |
4073 | ||
4074 | @node Func | |
4075 | @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]} | |
4076 | @cindex @code{func} directive | |
4077 | @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and | |
4078 | is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled. | |
4079 | Only @samp{--gstabs} is currently supported. | |
4080 | @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name} | |
4081 | prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used. | |
4082 | @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target. | |
4083 | All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type. | |
4084 | The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}. | |
4085 | ||
4086 | @node Global | |
4087 | @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}} | |
4088 | ||
4089 | @cindex @code{global} directive | |
4090 | @cindex symbol, making visible to linker | |
4091 | @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define | |
4092 | @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to | |
4093 | other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise, | |
4094 | @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name | |
4095 | from another file linked into the same program. | |
4096 | ||
4097 | Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for | |
4098 | compatibility with other assemblers. | |
4099 | ||
4100 | @ifset HPPA | |
4101 | On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other | |
4102 | partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well. | |
4103 | @xref{HPPA Directives,, HPPA Assembler Directives}. | |
4104 | @end ifset | |
4105 | ||
c91d2e08 NC |
4106 | @ifset ELF |
4107 | @node Hidden | |
4108 | @section @code{.hidden @var{names}} | |
4109 | ||
4110 | @cindex @code{.hidden} directive | |
4111 | @cindex Visibility | |
4112 | This one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are | |
a349d9dd PB |
4113 | @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and |
4114 | @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}). | |
c91d2e08 NC |
4115 | |
4116 | This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by | |
4117 | their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to | |
4118 | @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components. | |
4119 | Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well. | |
4120 | @end ifset | |
4121 | ||
252b5132 RH |
4122 | @node hword |
4123 | @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}} | |
4124 | ||
4125 | @cindex @code{hword} directive | |
4126 | @cindex integers, 16-bit | |
4127 | @cindex numbers, 16-bit | |
4128 | @cindex sixteen bit integers | |
4129 | This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits | |
4130 | a 16 bit number for each. | |
4131 | ||
4132 | @ifset GENERIC | |
4133 | This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target | |
4134 | architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}. | |
4135 | @end ifset | |
4136 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
4137 | @ifset W32 | |
4138 | This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}. | |
4139 | @end ifset | |
4140 | @ifset W16 | |
4141 | This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}. | |
4142 | @end ifset | |
4143 | @end ifclear | |
4144 | ||
4145 | @node Ident | |
4146 | @section @code{.ident} | |
4147 | ||
4148 | @cindex @code{ident} directive | |
4149 | This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. | |
a4fb0134 | 4150 | @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for source-file |
252b5132 RH |
4151 | compatibility with such assemblers, but does not actually emit anything |
4152 | for it. | |
4153 | ||
4154 | @node If | |
4155 | @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}} | |
4156 | ||
4157 | @cindex conditional assembly | |
4158 | @cindex @code{if} directive | |
4159 | @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only | |
4160 | considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument | |
4161 | (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of | |
4162 | the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif} | |
4163 | (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the | |
4164 | alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}). | |
3fd9f047 TW |
4165 | If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid |
4166 | nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block. | |
252b5132 RH |
4167 | |
4168 | The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported: | |
4169 | @table @code | |
4170 | @cindex @code{ifdef} directive | |
4171 | @item .ifdef @var{symbol} | |
4172 | Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol} | |
4173 | has been defined. | |
4174 | ||
4175 | @cindex @code{ifc} directive | |
4176 | @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2} | |
4177 | Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The | |
4178 | strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted, | |
4179 | the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the | |
4180 | end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The | |
4181 | string comparison is case sensitive. | |
4182 | ||
4183 | @cindex @code{ifeq} directive | |
4184 | @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression} | |
4185 | Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero. | |
4186 | ||
4187 | @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive | |
4188 | @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2} | |
4189 | Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes. | |
4190 | ||
4191 | @cindex @code{ifge} directive | |
4192 | @item .ifge @var{absolute expression} | |
4193 | Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or | |
4194 | equal to zero. | |
4195 | ||
4196 | @cindex @code{ifgt} directive | |
4197 | @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression} | |
4198 | Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero. | |
4199 | ||
4200 | @cindex @code{ifle} directive | |
4201 | @item .ifle @var{absolute expression} | |
4202 | Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal | |
4203 | to zero. | |
4204 | ||
4205 | @cindex @code{iflt} directive | |
4206 | @item .iflt @var{absolute expression} | |
4207 | Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero. | |
4208 | ||
4209 | @cindex @code{ifnc} directive | |
4210 | @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}. | |
4211 | Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the | |
4212 | following section of code if the two strings are not the same. | |
4213 | ||
4214 | @cindex @code{ifndef} directive | |
4215 | @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive | |
4216 | @item .ifndef @var{symbol} | |
4217 | @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol} | |
4218 | Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol} | |
4219 | has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. | |
4220 | ||
4221 | @cindex @code{ifne} directive | |
4222 | @item .ifne @var{absolute expression} | |
4223 | Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero | |
4224 | (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}). | |
4225 | ||
4226 | @cindex @code{ifnes} directive | |
4227 | @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2} | |
4228 | Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the | |
4229 | following section of code if the two strings are not the same. | |
4230 | @end table | |
4231 | ||
7e005732 NC |
4232 | @node Incbin |
4233 | @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]} | |
4234 | ||
4235 | @cindex @code{incbin} directive | |
4236 | @cindex binary files, including | |
4237 | The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current | |
4238 | location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line | |
4239 | option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required | |
4240 | around @var{file}. | |
4241 | ||
4242 | The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the | |
4243 | @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to | |
15dcfbc3 NC |
4244 | read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's |
4245 | responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and | |
4246 | after the @code{incbin} directive. | |
7e005732 | 4247 | |
252b5132 RH |
4248 | @node Include |
4249 | @section @code{.include "@var{file}"} | |
4250 | ||
4251 | @cindex @code{include} directive | |
4252 | @cindex supporting files, including | |
4253 | @cindex files, including | |
4254 | This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified | |
4255 | points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as | |
4256 | if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the | |
4257 | included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You | |
4258 | can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option | |
4259 | (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required | |
4260 | around @var{file}. | |
4261 | ||
4262 | @node Int | |
4263 | @section @code{.int @var{expressions}} | |
4264 | ||
4265 | @cindex @code{int} directive | |
4266 | @cindex integers, 32-bit | |
4267 | Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas. | |
4268 | For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that | |
4269 | expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind | |
4270 | of target the assembly is for. | |
4271 | ||
4272 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
4273 | @ifset H8 | |
4274 | On the H8/500 and most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit | |
4275 | integers. On the H8/300H and the Hitachi SH, however, @code{.int} emits | |
4276 | 32-bit integers. | |
4277 | @end ifset | |
4278 | @end ifclear | |
4279 | ||
c91d2e08 NC |
4280 | @ifset ELF |
4281 | @node Internal | |
4282 | @section @code{.internal @var{names}} | |
4283 | ||
4284 | @cindex @code{.internal} directive | |
4285 | @cindex Visibility | |
4286 | This one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are | |
a349d9dd PB |
4287 | @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and |
4288 | @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}). | |
c91d2e08 NC |
4289 | |
4290 | This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by | |
4291 | their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to | |
4292 | @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden} | |
4293 | (ie not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific | |
4294 | processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well. | |
4295 | @end ifset | |
4296 | ||
252b5132 RH |
4297 | @node Irp |
4298 | @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{} | |
4299 | ||
4300 | @cindex @code{irp} directive | |
4301 | Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}. | |
4302 | The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is | |
4303 | terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is | |
4304 | set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no | |
4305 | @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with | |
4306 | @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the | |
4307 | sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}. | |
4308 | ||
4309 | For example, assembling | |
4310 | ||
4311 | @example | |
4312 | .irp param,1,2,3 | |
4313 | move d\param,sp@@- | |
4314 | .endr | |
4315 | @end example | |
4316 | ||
4317 | is equivalent to assembling | |
4318 | ||
4319 | @example | |
4320 | move d1,sp@@- | |
4321 | move d2,sp@@- | |
4322 | move d3,sp@@- | |
4323 | @end example | |
4324 | ||
4325 | @node Irpc | |
4326 | @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{} | |
4327 | ||
4328 | @cindex @code{irpc} directive | |
4329 | Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}. | |
4330 | The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is | |
4331 | terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value}, | |
4332 | @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is | |
4333 | assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is | |
4334 | assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to | |
4335 | @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}. | |
4336 | ||
4337 | For example, assembling | |
4338 | ||
4339 | @example | |
4340 | .irpc param,123 | |
4341 | move d\param,sp@@- | |
4342 | .endr | |
4343 | @end example | |
4344 | ||
4345 | is equivalent to assembling | |
4346 | ||
4347 | @example | |
4348 | move d1,sp@@- | |
4349 | move d2,sp@@- | |
4350 | move d3,sp@@- | |
4351 | @end example | |
4352 | ||
4353 | @node Lcomm | |
4354 | @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}} | |
4355 | ||
4356 | @cindex @code{lcomm} directive | |
4357 | @cindex local common symbols | |
4358 | @cindex symbols, local common | |
4359 | Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common | |
4360 | denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are | |
4361 | those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss | |
4362 | section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol} | |
4363 | is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally | |
4364 | not visible to @code{@value{LD}}. | |
4365 | ||
4366 | @ifset GENERIC | |
4367 | Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This | |
4368 | argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section. | |
4369 | @end ifset | |
4370 | ||
4371 | @ifset HPPA | |
4372 | The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is | |
4373 | @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional. | |
4374 | @end ifset | |
4375 | ||
4376 | @node Lflags | |
4377 | @section @code{.lflags} | |
4378 | ||
4379 | @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored) | |
a4fb0134 | 4380 | @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other |
252b5132 RH |
4381 | assemblers, but ignores it. |
4382 | ||
4383 | @ifclear no-line-dir | |
4384 | @node Line | |
4385 | @section @code{.line @var{line-number}} | |
4386 | ||
4387 | @cindex @code{line} directive | |
4388 | @end ifclear | |
4389 | @ifset no-line-dir | |
4390 | @node Ln | |
4391 | @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}} | |
4392 | ||
4393 | @cindex @code{ln} directive | |
4394 | @end ifset | |
4395 | @cindex logical line number | |
4396 | @ifset aout-bout | |
4397 | Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute | |
4398 | expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other | |
4399 | statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are | |
4400 | reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day | |
a4fb0134 | 4401 | @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only |
252b5132 RH |
4402 | for compatibility with existing assembler programs. |
4403 | ||
4404 | @ifset GENERIC | |
4405 | @ifset A29K | |
4406 | @emph{Warning:} In the AMD29K configuration of @value{AS}, this command is | |
4407 | not available; use the synonym @code{.ln} in that context. | |
4408 | @end ifset | |
4409 | @end ifset | |
4410 | @end ifset | |
4411 | ||
4412 | @ifclear no-line-dir | |
4413 | Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or | |
a4fb0134 | 4414 | @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it |
252b5132 RH |
4415 | when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it |
4416 | were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a | |
4417 | @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. | |
4418 | ||
4419 | Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives | |
4420 | used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for | |
4421 | debugging. | |
4422 | @end ifclear | |
4423 | ||
4424 | @node Linkonce | |
4425 | @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]} | |
4426 | @cindex COMDAT | |
4427 | @cindex @code{linkonce} directive | |
4428 | @cindex common sections | |
4429 | Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it. | |
4430 | This may be used to include the same section in several different object files, | |
4431 | but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file. | |
4432 | The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section. | |
4433 | Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be | |
4434 | unique. | |
4435 | ||
4436 | This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this | |
4437 | writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable | |
4438 | Executable format used on Windows NT. | |
4439 | ||
4440 | The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the | |
4441 | following strings. For example: | |
4442 | @smallexample | |
4443 | .linkonce same_size | |
4444 | @end smallexample | |
4445 | Not all types may be supported on all object file formats. | |
4446 | ||
4447 | @table @code | |
4448 | @item discard | |
4449 | Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default. | |
4450 | ||
4451 | @item one_only | |
4452 | Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy. | |
4453 | ||
4454 | @item same_size | |
4455 | Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes. | |
4456 | ||
4457 | @item same_contents | |
4458 | Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents. | |
4459 | @end table | |
4460 | ||
4461 | @node Ln | |
4462 | @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}} | |
4463 | ||
4464 | @cindex @code{ln} directive | |
4465 | @ifclear no-line-dir | |
4466 | @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}. | |
4467 | @end ifclear | |
4468 | @ifset no-line-dir | |
a4fb0134 | 4469 | Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number} |
252b5132 RH |
4470 | must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical |
4471 | line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a | |
4472 | statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical | |
4473 | line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. | |
4474 | @ifset BOUT | |
4475 | ||
a4fb0134 | 4476 | This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is |
252b5132 RH |
4477 | configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF |
4478 | output format. | |
4479 | @end ifset | |
4480 | @end ifset | |
4481 | ||
4482 | @node MRI | |
4483 | @section @code{.mri @var{val}} | |
4484 | ||
4485 | @cindex @code{mri} directive | |
4486 | @cindex MRI mode, temporarily | |
a4fb0134 SC |
4487 | If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If |
4488 | @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change | |
252b5132 RH |
4489 | affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end |
4490 | of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}. | |
4491 | ||
4492 | @node List | |
4493 | @section @code{.list} | |
4494 | ||
4495 | @cindex @code{list} directive | |
4496 | @cindex listing control, turning on | |
4497 | Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or | |
4498 | not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an | |
4499 | internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the | |
4500 | counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are | |
4501 | generated whenever the counter is greater than zero. | |
4502 | ||
4503 | By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the | |
4504 | @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}), | |
4505 | the initial value of the listing counter is one. | |
4506 | ||
4507 | @node Long | |
4508 | @section @code{.long @var{expressions}} | |
4509 | ||
4510 | @cindex @code{long} directive | |
4511 | @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}, @pxref{Int,,@code{.int}}. | |
4512 | ||
4513 | @ignore | |
4514 | @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is | |
4515 | @c what it really ought to do | |
4516 | @node Lsym | |
4517 | @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} | |
4518 | ||
4519 | @cindex @code{lsym} directive | |
4520 | @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly | |
4521 | @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in | |
4522 | the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the | |
4523 | rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be | |
4524 | the same as the expression value: | |
4525 | @smallexample | |
4526 | @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0 | |
4527 | @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})} | |
4528 | @var{value} = @var{expression} | |
4529 | @end smallexample | |
4530 | @noindent | |
4531 | The new symbol is not flagged as external. | |
4532 | @end ignore | |
4533 | ||
4534 | @node Macro | |
4535 | @section @code{.macro} | |
4536 | ||
4537 | @cindex macros | |
4538 | The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that | |
4539 | generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro | |
4540 | @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory: | |
4541 | ||
4542 | @example | |
4543 | .macro sum from=0, to=5 | |
4544 | .long \from | |
4545 | .if \to-\from | |
4546 | sum "(\from+1)",\to | |
4547 | .endif | |
4548 | .endm | |
4549 | @end example | |
4550 | ||
4551 | @noindent | |
4552 | With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input: | |
4553 | ||
4554 | @example | |
4555 | .long 0 | |
4556 | .long 1 | |
4557 | .long 2 | |
4558 | .long 3 | |
4559 | .long 4 | |
4560 | .long 5 | |
4561 | @end example | |
4562 | ||
4563 | @ftable @code | |
4564 | @item .macro @var{macname} | |
4565 | @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{} | |
4566 | @cindex @code{macro} directive | |
4567 | Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro | |
4568 | definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name, | |
4569 | separated by commas or spaces. You can supply a default value for any | |
4570 | macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. For | |
4571 | example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements: | |
4572 | ||
4573 | @table @code | |
4574 | @item .macro comm | |
4575 | Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no | |
4576 | arguments. | |
4577 | ||
4578 | @item .macro plus1 p, p1 | |
4579 | @itemx .macro plus1 p p1 | |
4580 | Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1}, | |
4581 | which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write | |
4582 | @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments. | |
4583 | ||
4584 | @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2 | |
4585 | Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two | |
4586 | arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second. | |
4587 | After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as | |
4588 | @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to | |
4589 | @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str | |
4590 | ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case | |
4591 | @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}). | |
4592 | @end table | |
4593 | ||
4594 | When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by | |
4595 | position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to | |
4596 | @samp{sum to=17, from=9}. | |
4597 | ||
4598 | @item .endm | |
4599 | @cindex @code{endm} directive | |
4600 | Mark the end of a macro definition. | |
4601 | ||
4602 | @item .exitm | |
4603 | @cindex @code{exitm} directive | |
4604 | Exit early from the current macro definition. | |
4605 | ||
4606 | @cindex number of macros executed | |
4607 | @cindex macros, count executed | |
4608 | @item \@@ | |
a4fb0134 | 4609 | @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has |
252b5132 RH |
4610 | executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your |
4611 | output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}. | |
4612 | ||
4613 | @ignore | |
4614 | @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ] | |
4615 | @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate | |
4616 | macro syntax'' with @samp{-a} or @samp{--alternate}.} @xref{Alternate,, | |
4617 | Alternate macro syntax}. | |
4618 | ||
4619 | Generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and | |
4620 | replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The | |
4621 | replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each | |
4622 | separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that | |
4623 | define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions. | |
4624 | @end ignore | |
4625 | @end ftable | |
4626 | ||
4627 | @node Nolist | |
4628 | @section @code{.nolist} | |
4629 | ||
4630 | @cindex @code{nolist} directive | |
4631 | @cindex listing control, turning off | |
4632 | Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or | |
4633 | not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an | |
4634 | internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the | |
4635 | counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are | |
4636 | generated whenever the counter is greater than zero. | |
4637 | ||
4638 | @node Octa | |
4639 | @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}} | |
4640 | ||
4641 | @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn? | |
4642 | @cindex @code{octa} directive | |
4643 | @cindex integer, 16-byte | |
4644 | @cindex sixteen byte integer | |
4645 | This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each | |
4646 | bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer. | |
4647 | ||
4648 | The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes; | |
4649 | hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes. | |
4650 | ||
4651 | @node Org | |
4652 | @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}} | |
4653 | ||
4654 | @cindex @code{org} directive | |
4655 | @cindex location counter, advancing | |
4656 | @cindex advancing location counter | |
4657 | @cindex current address, advancing | |
4658 | Advance the location counter of the current section to | |
4659 | @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an | |
4660 | expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is, | |
4661 | you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the | |
4662 | wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible | |
4663 | with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute, | |
a4fb0134 | 4664 | @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc} |
252b5132 RH |
4665 | is the same as the current subsection. |
4666 | ||
4667 | @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it | |
4668 | unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter | |
4669 | backwards. | |
4670 | ||
4671 | @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific | |
4672 | @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual) | |
4673 | @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91 | |
a4fb0134 | 4674 | Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc} |
252b5132 RH |
4675 | may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await |
4676 | a chance to share your improved assembler. | |
4677 | ||
4678 | Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not | |
4679 | to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other | |
4680 | people's assemblers. | |
4681 | ||
4682 | When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the | |
4683 | intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an | |
4684 | absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted, | |
4685 | @var{fill} defaults to zero. | |
4686 | ||
4687 | @node P2align | |
4688 | @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}} | |
4689 | ||
4690 | @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two | |
4691 | @cindex @code{p2align} directive | |
4692 | Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular | |
4693 | storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the | |
4694 | number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after | |
4695 | advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location | |
4696 | counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a | |
4697 | multiple of 8, no change is needed. | |
4698 | ||
4699 | The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the | |
4700 | padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the | |
4701 | padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is | |
4702 | marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled | |
4703 | with no-op instructions. | |
4704 | ||
4705 | The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present, | |
4706 | it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment | |
4707 | directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the | |
4708 | specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the | |
4709 | fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the | |
4710 | required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled | |
4711 | with no-op instructions when appropriate. | |
4712 | ||
4713 | @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive | |
4714 | @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive | |
4715 | The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the | |
4716 | @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill | |
4717 | pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the | |
4718 | fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw | |
4719 | 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be | |
4720 | filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon | |
4721 | the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is | |
4722 | undefined. | |
4723 | ||
c91d2e08 NC |
4724 | @ifset ELF |
4725 | @node Previous | |
4726 | @section @code{.previous} | |
4727 | ||
4728 | @cindex @code{.previous} directive | |
4729 | @cindex Section Stack | |
4730 | This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are | |
a349d9dd PB |
4731 | @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), |
4732 | @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection} | |
4733 | (@pxref{PopSection}). | |
c91d2e08 NC |
4734 | |
4735 | This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently | |
4736 | referenced section (and subsection) prior to this one. Multiple | |
4737 | @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their | |
4738 | subsections). | |
4739 | ||
4740 | In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with | |
4741 | the top section on the section stack. | |
4742 | @end ifset | |
4743 | ||
4744 | @ifset ELF | |
4745 | @node PopSection | |
4746 | @section @code{.popsection} | |
4747 | ||
4748 | @cindex @code{.popsection} directive | |
4749 | @cindex Section Stack | |
4750 | This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are | |
a349d9dd PB |
4751 | @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), |
4752 | @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous} | |
4753 | (@pxref{Previous}). | |
c91d2e08 NC |
4754 | |
4755 | This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top | |
4756 | section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the | |
4757 | stack. | |
c91d2e08 NC |
4758 | @end ifset |
4759 | ||
252b5132 RH |
4760 | @node Print |
4761 | @section @code{.print @var{string}} | |
4762 | ||
4763 | @cindex @code{print} directive | |
a4fb0134 | 4764 | @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during |
252b5132 RH |
4765 | assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes. |
4766 | ||
c91d2e08 NC |
4767 | @ifset ELF |
4768 | @node Protected | |
4769 | @section @code{.protected @var{names}} | |
4770 | ||
4771 | @cindex @code{.protected} directive | |
4772 | @cindex Visibility | |
4773 | This one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are | |
a349d9dd | 4774 | @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}). |
c91d2e08 NC |
4775 | |
4776 | This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by | |
4777 | their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to | |
4778 | @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the | |
4779 | components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that | |
4780 | component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt | |
4781 | this. | |
4782 | @end ifset | |
4783 | ||
252b5132 RH |
4784 | @node Psize |
4785 | @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}} | |
4786 | ||
4787 | @cindex @code{psize} directive | |
4788 | @cindex listing control: paper size | |
4789 | @cindex paper size, for listings | |
4790 | Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the | |
4791 | number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings. | |
4792 | ||
4793 | If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count | |
4794 | of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the | |
4795 | default width is 200 columns. | |
4796 | ||
a4fb0134 | 4797 | @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of |
252b5132 RH |
4798 | lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using |
4799 | @code{.eject}). | |
4800 | ||
4801 | If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save | |
4802 | those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}. | |
4803 | ||
4804 | @node Purgem | |
4805 | @section @code{.purgem @var{name}} | |
4806 | ||
4807 | @cindex @code{purgem} directive | |
4808 | Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be | |
4809 | expanded. @xref{Macro}. | |
4810 | ||
c91d2e08 NC |
4811 | @ifset ELF |
4812 | @node PushSection | |
4813 | @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} , @var{subsection}} | |
4814 | ||
4815 | @cindex @code{.pushsection} directive | |
4816 | @cindex Section Stack | |
4817 | This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are | |
a349d9dd PB |
4818 | @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), |
4819 | @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous} | |
4820 | (@pxref{Previous}). | |
c91d2e08 | 4821 | |
a349d9dd | 4822 | This directive is a synonym for @code{.section}. It pushes the current section |
c91d2e08 NC |
4823 | (and subsection) onto the top of the section stack, and then replaces the |
4824 | current section and subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. | |
c91d2e08 NC |
4825 | @end ifset |
4826 | ||
252b5132 RH |
4827 | @node Quad |
4828 | @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}} | |
4829 | ||
4830 | @cindex @code{quad} directive | |
4831 | @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For | |
4832 | each bignum, it emits | |
4833 | @ifclear bignum-16 | |
4834 | an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a | |
4835 | warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum. | |
4836 | @cindex eight-byte integer | |
4837 | @cindex integer, 8-byte | |
4838 | ||
4839 | The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes; | |
4840 | hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes. | |
4841 | @end ifclear | |
4842 | @ifset bignum-16 | |
4843 | a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a | |
4844 | warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum. | |
4845 | @cindex sixteen-byte integer | |
4846 | @cindex integer, 16-byte | |
4847 | @end ifset | |
4848 | ||
4849 | @node Rept | |
4850 | @section @code{.rept @var{count}} | |
4851 | ||
4852 | @cindex @code{rept} directive | |
4853 | Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next | |
4854 | @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times. | |
4855 | ||
4856 | For example, assembling | |
4857 | ||
4858 | @example | |
4859 | .rept 3 | |
4860 | .long 0 | |
4861 | .endr | |
4862 | @end example | |
4863 | ||
4864 | is equivalent to assembling | |
4865 | ||
4866 | @example | |
4867 | .long 0 | |
4868 | .long 0 | |
4869 | .long 0 | |
4870 | @end example | |
4871 | ||
4872 | @node Sbttl | |
4873 | @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"} | |
4874 | ||
4875 | @cindex @code{sbttl} directive | |
4876 | @cindex subtitles for listings | |
4877 | @cindex listing control: subtitle | |
4878 | Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the | |
4879 | title line) when generating assembly listings. | |
4880 | ||
4881 | This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if | |
4882 | it appears within ten lines of the top of a page. | |
4883 | ||
4884 | @ifset COFF | |
4885 | @node Scl | |
4886 | @section @code{.scl @var{class}} | |
4887 | ||
4888 | @cindex @code{scl} directive | |
4889 | @cindex symbol storage class (COFF) | |
4890 | @cindex COFF symbol storage class | |
4891 | Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be | |
4892 | used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag | |
4893 | whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further | |
4894 | symbolic debugging information. | |
4895 | @ifset BOUT | |
4896 | ||
4897 | The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when | |
a4fb0134 | 4898 | configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}} |
252b5132 RH |
4899 | accepts this directive but ignores it. |
4900 | @end ifset | |
4901 | @end ifset | |
4902 | ||
4903 | @node Section | |
c91d2e08 | 4904 | @section @code{.section @var{name}} (COFF version) |
252b5132 RH |
4905 | |
4906 | @cindex @code{section} directive | |
4907 | @cindex named section | |
4908 | Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section | |
4909 | named @var{name}. | |
4910 | ||
4911 | This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily | |
4912 | named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even | |
4913 | with a standard @code{a.out} section name. | |
4914 | ||
252b5132 RH |
4915 | For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following |
4916 | ways: | |
c91d2e08 | 4917 | |
252b5132 RH |
4918 | @smallexample |
4919 | .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"] | |
4920 | .section @var{name}[, @var{subsegment}] | |
4921 | @end smallexample | |
4922 | ||
4923 | If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the | |
4924 | section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized: | |
4925 | @table @code | |
4926 | @item b | |
4927 | bss section (uninitialized data) | |
4928 | @item n | |
4929 | section is not loaded | |
4930 | @item w | |
4931 | writable section | |
4932 | @item d | |
4933 | data section | |
4934 | @item r | |
4935 | read-only section | |
4936 | @item x | |
4937 | executable section | |
2dcc60be ILT |
4938 | @item s |
4939 | shared section (meaningful for PE targets) | |
252b5132 RH |
4940 | @end table |
4941 | ||
4942 | If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If | |
4943 | the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be | |
7e84d676 NC |
4944 | loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes |
4945 | from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it | |
4946 | will be as if no flags had been specified at all. | |
252b5132 RH |
4947 | |
4948 | If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is | |
4949 | taken as a subsegment number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}). | |
252b5132 | 4950 | |
c91d2e08 NC |
4951 | |
4952 | @section @code{.section @var{name}} (ELF version) | |
4953 | ||
4954 | @cindex @code{section} directive | |
4955 | @cindex named section | |
252b5132 | 4956 | @ifset ELF |
c91d2e08 NC |
4957 | @cindex Section Stack |
4958 | This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are | |
a349d9dd PB |
4959 | @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection} |
4960 | (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and | |
4961 | @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}). | |
c91d2e08 NC |
4962 | @end ifset |
4963 | ||
252b5132 | 4964 | For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this: |
c91d2e08 | 4965 | |
252b5132 | 4966 | @smallexample |
ec38dd05 | 4967 | .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[, @@@var{entsize}]]] |
252b5132 | 4968 | @end smallexample |
c91d2e08 | 4969 | |
252b5132 | 4970 | The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any |
a349d9dd | 4971 | combination of the following characters: |
252b5132 RH |
4972 | @table @code |
4973 | @item a | |
4974 | section is allocatable | |
4975 | @item w | |
4976 | section is writable | |
4977 | @item x | |
4978 | section is executable | |
ec38dd05 JJ |
4979 | @item M |
4980 | section is mergeable | |
4981 | @item S | |
4982 | section contains zero terminated strings | |
252b5132 RH |
4983 | @end table |
4984 | ||
4985 | The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants: | |
4986 | @table @code | |
4987 | @item @@progbits | |
4988 | section contains data | |
4989 | @item @@nobits | |
4990 | section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space) | |
4991 | @end table | |
4992 | ||
ec38dd05 JJ |
4993 | If @var{flags} contains @code{M} flag, @var{type} argument must be specified |
4994 | as well as @var{entsize} argument. Sections with @code{M} flag but not | |
4995 | @code{S} flag must contain fixed size constants, each @var{entsize} octets | |
4996 | long. Sections with both @code{M} and @code{S} must contain zero terminated | |
4997 | strings where each character is @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove | |
4998 | duplicates within sections with the same name, same entity size and same flags. | |
4999 | ||
252b5132 RH |
5000 | If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If |
5001 | the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have | |
5002 | none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor | |
5003 | executable. The section will contain data. | |
5004 | ||
5005 | For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section} | |
5006 | directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler: | |
c91d2e08 | 5007 | |
252b5132 RH |
5008 | @smallexample |
5009 | .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...] | |
5010 | @end smallexample | |
c91d2e08 | 5011 | |
252b5132 RH |
5012 | Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma |
5013 | separated flags: | |
5014 | @table @code | |
5015 | @item #alloc | |
5016 | section is allocatable | |
5017 | @item #write | |
5018 | section is writable | |
5019 | @item #execinstr | |
5020 | section is executable | |
5021 | @end table | |
c91d2e08 NC |
5022 | |
5023 | This directive replaces the current section and subsection. The replaced | |
5024 | section and subsection are pushed onto the section stack. See the contents of | |
5025 | the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for some examples of | |
5026 | how this directive and the other section stack directives work. | |
252b5132 RH |
5027 | |
5028 | @node Set | |
5029 | @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} | |
5030 | ||
5031 | @cindex @code{set} directive | |
5032 | @cindex symbol value, setting | |
5033 | Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This | |
5034 | changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to | |
5035 | @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains | |
5036 | flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}). | |
5037 | ||
5038 | You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly. | |
5039 | ||
5040 | If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object | |
5041 | file is the last value stored into it. | |
5042 | ||
5043 | @ifset HPPA | |
5044 | The syntax for @code{set} on the HPPA is | |
5045 | @samp{@var{symbol} .set @var{expression}}. | |
5046 | @end ifset | |
5047 | ||
5048 | @node Short | |
5049 | @section @code{.short @var{expressions}} | |
5050 | ||
5051 | @cindex @code{short} directive | |
5052 | @ifset GENERIC | |
5053 | @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}. | |
5054 | @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}. | |
5055 | ||
5056 | In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate | |
5057 | numbers of different lengths; @pxref{Machine Dependencies}. | |
5058 | @end ifset | |
5059 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
5060 | @ifset W16 | |
5061 | @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}. | |
5062 | @end ifset | |
5063 | @ifset W32 | |
5064 | This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits | |
5065 | a 16 bit number for each. | |
5066 | @end ifset | |
5067 | @end ifclear | |
5068 | ||
5069 | @node Single | |
5070 | @section @code{.single @var{flonums}} | |
5071 | ||
5072 | @cindex @code{single} directive | |
5073 | @cindex floating point numbers (single) | |
5074 | This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It | |
5075 | has the same effect as @code{.float}. | |
5076 | @ifset GENERIC | |
5077 | The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how | |
a4fb0134 | 5078 | @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}. |
252b5132 RH |
5079 | @end ifset |
5080 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
5081 | @ifset IEEEFLOAT | |
5082 | On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point | |
5083 | numbers in @sc{ieee} format. | |
5084 | @end ifset | |
5085 | @end ifclear | |
5086 | ||
252b5132 | 5087 | @node Size |
c91d2e08 | 5088 | @section @code{.size} (COFF version) |
c91d2e08 | 5089 | |
9a297610 | 5090 | @cindex @code{size} directive |
252b5132 RH |
5091 | This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging |
5092 | information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside | |
5093 | @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. | |
252b5132 | 5094 | |
c91d2e08 | 5095 | @ifset BOUT |
252b5132 | 5096 | @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when |
a4fb0134 | 5097 | @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but |
252b5132 RH |
5098 | ignores it. |
5099 | @end ifset | |
c91d2e08 NC |
5100 | |
5101 | @section @code{.size @var{name} , @var{expression}} (ELF version) | |
5102 | @cindex @code{size} directive | |
5103 | ||
5104 | This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol @var{name}. | |
5105 | The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label | |
5106 | arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function | |
5107 | symbols. | |
252b5132 RH |
5108 | |
5109 | @node Sleb128 | |
5110 | @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}} | |
5111 | ||
5112 | @cindex @code{sleb128} directive | |
5113 | @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a | |
5114 | compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF | |
5115 | symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128,@code{.uleb128}}. | |
5116 | ||
5117 | @ifclear no-space-dir | |
5118 | @node Skip | |
5119 | @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}} | |
5120 | ||
5121 | @cindex @code{skip} directive | |
5122 | @cindex filling memory | |
5123 | This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both | |
5124 | @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and | |
5125 | @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as | |
5126 | @samp{.space}. | |
5127 | ||
5128 | @node Space | |
5129 | @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}} | |
5130 | ||
5131 | @cindex @code{space} directive | |
5132 | @cindex filling memory | |
5133 | This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both | |
5134 | @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma | |
5135 | and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same | |
5136 | as @samp{.skip}. | |
5137 | ||
5138 | @ifset HPPA | |
5139 | @quotation | |
5140 | @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA | |
5141 | targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800 | |
5142 | Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the | |
5143 | @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives}, | |
5144 | for a summary. | |
5145 | @end quotation | |
5146 | @end ifset | |
5147 | @end ifclear | |
5148 | ||
5149 | @ifset A29K | |
5150 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
5151 | @node Space | |
5152 | @section @code{.space} | |
5153 | @cindex @code{space} directive | |
5154 | @end ifclear | |
5155 | On the AMD 29K, this directive is ignored; it is accepted for | |
5156 | compatibility with other AMD 29K assemblers. | |
5157 | ||
5158 | @quotation | |
5159 | @emph{Warning:} In most versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler, the directive | |
5160 | @code{.space} has the effect of @code{.block} @xref{Machine Dependencies}. | |
5161 | @end quotation | |
5162 | @end ifset | |
5163 | ||
5164 | @ifset have-stabs | |
5165 | @node Stab | |
5166 | @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs} | |
5167 | ||
5168 | @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for | |
5169 | @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives | |
5170 | There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}. | |
5171 | All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers. | |
a4fb0134 | 5172 | The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they |
252b5132 RH |
5173 | cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file. |
5174 | Up to five fields are required: | |
5175 | ||
5176 | @table @var | |
5177 | @item string | |
5178 | This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except | |
5179 | @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some | |
5180 | debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names | |
5181 | using this field. | |
5182 | ||
5183 | @item type | |
5184 | An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of | |
5185 | this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}} | |
5186 | and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns. | |
5187 | ||
5188 | @item other | |
5189 | An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the | |
5190 | low 8 bits of this expression. | |
5191 | ||
5192 | @item desc | |
5193 | An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16 | |
5194 | bits of this expression. | |
5195 | ||
5196 | @item value | |
5197 | An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value. | |
5198 | @end table | |
5199 | ||
5200 | If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn}, | |
5201 | or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created; | |
5202 | you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is | |
5203 | compatible with earlier assemblers! | |
5204 | ||
5205 | @table @code | |
5206 | @cindex @code{stabd} directive | |
5207 | @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} | |
5208 | ||
5209 | The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string. | |
5210 | It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a | |
5211 | null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty | |
5212 | strings. | |
5213 | ||
5214 | The symbol's value is set to the location counter, | |
5215 | relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol | |
5216 | is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was | |
5217 | assembled. | |
5218 | ||
5219 | @cindex @code{stabn} directive | |
5220 | @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value} | |
5221 | The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}. | |
5222 | ||
5223 | @cindex @code{stabs} directive | |
5224 | @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value} | |
5225 | All five fields are specified. | |
5226 | @end table | |
5227 | @end ifset | |
5228 | @c end have-stabs | |
5229 | ||
5230 | @node String | |
5231 | @section @code{.string} "@var{str}" | |
5232 | ||
5233 | @cindex string, copying to object file | |
5234 | @cindex @code{string} directive | |
5235 | ||
5236 | Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than | |
5237 | one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a | |
5238 | particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte. | |
5239 | You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}. | |
5240 | ||
5241 | @node Struct | |
5242 | @section @code{.struct @var{expression}} | |
5243 | ||
5244 | @cindex @code{struct} directive | |
5245 | Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression}, | |
5246 | which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows: | |
5247 | @smallexample | |
5248 | .struct 0 | |
5249 | field1: | |
5250 | .struct field1 + 4 | |
5251 | field2: | |
5252 | .struct field2 + 4 | |
5253 | field3: | |
5254 | @end smallexample | |
5255 | This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol | |
5256 | @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the | |
5257 | value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to | |
5258 | use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section | |
5259 | before further assembly. | |
5260 | ||
c91d2e08 NC |
5261 | @ifset ELF |
5262 | @node SubSection | |
5263 | @section @code{.subsection @var{name}} | |
5264 | ||
5265 | @cindex @code{.subsection} directive | |
5266 | @cindex Section Stack | |
5267 | This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are | |
a349d9dd PB |
5268 | @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), |
5269 | @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous} | |
5270 | (@pxref{Previous}). | |
c91d2e08 NC |
5271 | |
5272 | This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current | |
5273 | section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack | |
5274 | in place of the then current top of stack subsection. | |
c91d2e08 NC |
5275 | @end ifset |
5276 | ||
252b5132 RH |
5277 | @ifset ELF |
5278 | @node Symver | |
5279 | @section @code{.symver} | |
5280 | @cindex @code{symver} directive | |
5281 | @cindex symbol versioning | |
5282 | @cindex versions of symbols | |
5283 | Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes | |
5284 | within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is | |
5285 | typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library. | |
5286 | There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound | |
5287 | into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a | |
5288 | shared library. | |
5289 | ||
79082ff0 | 5290 | For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this: |
252b5132 RH |
5291 | @smallexample |
5292 | .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename} | |
5293 | @end smallexample | |
339681c0 | 5294 | If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file |
79082ff0 | 5295 | being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol |
252b5132 RH |
5296 | alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we |
5297 | just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't | |
5298 | permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name | |
5299 | of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name} | |
5300 | itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to | |
5301 | have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source | |
5302 | file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a | |
5303 | function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be | |
5304 | the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when | |
5305 | building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned | |
5306 | symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the | |
5307 | nodename of the symbol you are trying to override. | |
339681c0 L |
5308 | |
5309 | If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all | |
5310 | references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no | |
5311 | reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the | |
5312 | symbol table. | |
79082ff0 L |
5313 | |
5314 | Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is: | |
5315 | @smallexample | |
5316 | .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename} | |
5317 | @end smallexample | |
5318 | In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within | |
a349d9dd | 5319 | the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The |
79082ff0 L |
5320 | difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve |
5321 | references to @var{name2} by the linker. | |
5322 | ||
5323 | The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is: | |
5324 | @smallexample | |
5325 | .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename} | |
5326 | @end smallexample | |
5327 | When @var{name} is not defined within the | |
5328 | file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When | |
5329 | @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol | |
5330 | name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}. | |
252b5132 RH |
5331 | @end ifset |
5332 | ||
5333 | @ifset COFF | |
5334 | @node Tag | |
5335 | @section @code{.tag @var{structname}} | |
5336 | ||
5337 | @cindex COFF structure debugging | |
5338 | @cindex structure debugging, COFF | |
5339 | @cindex @code{tag} directive | |
5340 | This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging | |
5341 | information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside | |
5342 | @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure | |
5343 | definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures. | |
5344 | @ifset BOUT | |
5345 | ||
5346 | @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when | |
a4fb0134 | 5347 | @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but |
252b5132 RH |
5348 | ignores it. |
5349 | @end ifset | |
5350 | @end ifset | |
5351 | ||
5352 | @node Text | |
5353 | @section @code{.text @var{subsection}} | |
5354 | ||
5355 | @cindex @code{text} directive | |
a4fb0134 | 5356 | Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of |
252b5132 RH |
5357 | the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute |
5358 | expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero | |
5359 | is used. | |
5360 | ||
5361 | @node Title | |
5362 | @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"} | |
5363 | ||
5364 | @cindex @code{title} directive | |
5365 | @cindex listing control: title line | |
5366 | Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the | |
5367 | source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings. | |
5368 | ||
5369 | This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if | |
5370 | it appears within ten lines of the top of a page. | |
5371 | ||
252b5132 | 5372 | @node Type |
c91d2e08 | 5373 | @section @code{.type @var{int}} (COFF version) |
252b5132 RH |
5374 | |
5375 | @cindex COFF symbol type | |
5376 | @cindex symbol type, COFF | |
5377 | @cindex @code{type} directive | |
5378 | This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs, | |
5379 | records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table entry. | |
252b5132 | 5380 | |
c91d2e08 | 5381 | @ifset BOUT |
252b5132 | 5382 | @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when |
a4fb0134 | 5383 | @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this |
252b5132 RH |
5384 | directive but ignores it. |
5385 | @end ifset | |
c91d2e08 NC |
5386 | |
5387 | @section @code{.type @var{name} , @var{type description}} (ELF version) | |
5388 | ||
5389 | @cindex ELF symbol type | |
5390 | @cindex symbol type, ELF | |
5391 | @cindex @code{type} directive | |
5392 | This directive is used to set the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a | |
a349d9dd | 5393 | function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes |
c91d2e08 | 5394 | supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide |
a349d9dd | 5395 | compatibility with various other assemblers. The syntaxes supported are: |
c91d2e08 NC |
5396 | |
5397 | @smallexample | |
5398 | .type <name>,#function | |
5399 | .type <name>,#object | |
5400 | ||
5401 | .type <name>,@@function | |
5402 | .type <name>,@@object | |
5403 | ||
5404 | .type <name>,%function | |
5405 | .type <name>,%object | |
5406 | ||
5407 | .type <name>,"function" | |
5408 | .type <name>,"object" | |
5409 | ||
5410 | .type <name> STT_FUNCTION | |
5411 | .type <name> STT_OBJECT | |
5412 | @end smallexample | |
5413 | ||
5414 | @node Uleb128 | |
5415 | @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}} | |
5416 | ||
5417 | @cindex @code{uleb128} directive | |
5418 | @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a | |
5419 | compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF | |
5420 | symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128,@code{.sleb128}}. | |
252b5132 RH |
5421 | |
5422 | @ifset COFF | |
5423 | @node Val | |
5424 | @section @code{.val @var{addr}} | |
5425 | ||
5426 | @cindex @code{val} directive | |
5427 | @cindex COFF value attribute | |
5428 | @cindex value attribute, COFF | |
5429 | This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs, | |
5430 | records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table | |
5431 | entry. | |
5432 | @ifset BOUT | |
5433 | ||
a4fb0134 | 5434 | @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is |
252b5132 RH |
5435 | configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it. |
5436 | @end ifset | |
5437 | @end ifset | |
5438 | ||
2e13b764 | 5439 | @ifset ELF |
c91d2e08 NC |
5440 | @node Version |
5441 | @section @code{.version "@var{string}"} | |
2e13b764 | 5442 | |
c91d2e08 NC |
5443 | @cindex @code{.version} |
5444 | This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF | |
5445 | formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}. | |
9a297610 | 5446 | @end ifset |
2e13b764 | 5447 | |
c91d2e08 NC |
5448 | @ifset ELF |
5449 | @node VTableEntry | |
5450 | @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}} | |
2e13b764 | 5451 | |
c91d2e08 NC |
5452 | @cindex @code{.vtable_entry} |
5453 | This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a | |
5454 | @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}. | |
2e13b764 | 5455 | |
c91d2e08 NC |
5456 | @node VTableInherit |
5457 | @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}} | |
2e13b764 | 5458 | |
c91d2e08 NC |
5459 | @cindex @code{.vtable_inherit} |
5460 | This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol | |
5461 | @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the | |
a349d9dd | 5462 | parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the |
c91d2e08 NC |
5463 | parent name of @code{0} is treated as refering the @code{*ABS*} section. |
5464 | @end ifset | |
2e13b764 | 5465 | |
c91d2e08 NC |
5466 | @ifset ELF |
5467 | @node Weak | |
5468 | @section @code{.weak @var{names}} | |
2e13b764 | 5469 | |
c91d2e08 | 5470 | @cindex @code{.weak} |
a349d9dd | 5471 | This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol |
c91d2e08 | 5472 | @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created. |
2e13b764 NC |
5473 | @end ifset |
5474 | ||
252b5132 RH |
5475 | @node Word |
5476 | @section @code{.word @var{expressions}} | |
5477 | ||
5478 | @cindex @code{word} directive | |
5479 | This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, | |
5480 | separated by commas. | |
5481 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
5482 | @ifset W32 | |
a4fb0134 | 5483 | For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number. |
252b5132 RH |
5484 | @end ifset |
5485 | @ifset W16 | |
a4fb0134 | 5486 | For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number. |
252b5132 RH |
5487 | @end ifset |
5488 | @end ifclear | |
5489 | @ifset GENERIC | |
5490 | ||
5491 | The size of the number emitted, and its byte order, | |
5492 | depend on what target computer the assembly is for. | |
5493 | @end ifset | |
5494 | ||
5495 | @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't | |
5496 | @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps. | |
5497 | @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE | |
5498 | @cindex difference tables altered | |
5499 | @cindex altered difference tables | |
5500 | @quotation | |
5501 | @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers} | |
5502 | @end quotation | |
5503 | ||
5504 | @ifset GENERIC | |
5505 | Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit | |
5506 | addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of | |
5507 | interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it; | |
5508 | @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue. | |
5509 | ||
5510 | @end ifset | |
5511 | In order to assemble compiler output into something that works, | |
a4fb0134 | 5512 | @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives. |
252b5132 | 5513 | Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by |
a4fb0134 | 5514 | compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a |
252b5132 | 5515 | directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between |
a4fb0134 | 5516 | @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}} |
252b5132 RH |
5517 | creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label. |
5518 | This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the | |
5519 | first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow | |
5520 | of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the | |
5521 | table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word} | |
5522 | contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to | |
5523 | @code{sym2}. | |
5524 | ||
5525 | If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the | |
5526 | secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a | |
5527 | @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a | |
5528 | long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table, | |
5529 | and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3} | |
5530 | minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many | |
5531 | entries in the original jump table as necessary. | |
5532 | ||
5533 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
a4fb0134 | 5534 | @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the |
252b5132 RH |
5535 | @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse |
5536 | assembly language programmers. | |
5537 | @end ifset | |
5538 | @end ifset | |
5539 | @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE | |
5540 | ||
5541 | @node Deprecated | |
5542 | @section Deprecated Directives | |
5543 | ||
5544 | @cindex deprecated directives | |
5545 | @cindex obsolescent directives | |
5546 | One day these directives won't work. | |
5547 | They are included for compatibility with older assemblers. | |
5548 | @table @t | |
5549 | @item .abort | |
5550 | @item .line | |
5551 | @end table | |
5552 | ||
5553 | @ifset GENERIC | |
5554 | @node Machine Dependencies | |
5555 | @chapter Machine Dependent Features | |
5556 | ||
5557 | @cindex machine dependencies | |
5558 | The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on | |
a4fb0134 SC |
5559 | each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations |
5560 | vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional | |
252b5132 RH |
5561 | directives or command-line options for compatibility with other |
5562 | assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of | |
a4fb0134 | 5563 | @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch |
252b5132 RH |
5564 | optimization. |
5565 | ||
5566 | This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not | |
5567 | include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that | |
5568 | subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual. | |
5569 | ||
5570 | @menu | |
5571 | @ifset A29K | |
5572 | * AMD29K-Dependent:: AMD 29K Dependent Features | |
5573 | @end ifset | |
5574 | @ifset ARC | |
5575 | * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features | |
5576 | @end ifset | |
5577 | @ifset ARM | |
5578 | * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features | |
5579 | @end ifset | |
5580 | @ifset D10V | |
5581 | * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features | |
5582 | @end ifset | |
5583 | @ifset D30V | |
5584 | * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features | |
5585 | @end ifset | |
5586 | @ifset H8/300 | |
5587 | * H8/300-Dependent:: Hitachi H8/300 Dependent Features | |
5588 | @end ifset | |
5589 | @ifset H8/500 | |
5590 | * H8/500-Dependent:: Hitachi H8/500 Dependent Features | |
5591 | @end ifset | |
5592 | @ifset HPPA | |
5593 | * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features | |
5594 | @end ifset | |
5b93d8bb AM |
5595 | @ifset I370 |
5596 | * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features | |
5597 | @end ifset | |
252b5132 | 5598 | @ifset I80386 |
55b62671 | 5599 | * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features |
252b5132 | 5600 | @end ifset |
e3308d0d JE |
5601 | @ifset I860 |
5602 | * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features | |
5603 | @end ifset | |
252b5132 RH |
5604 | @ifset I960 |
5605 | * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features | |
5606 | @end ifset | |
ec694b89 NC |
5607 | @ifset M32R |
5608 | * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features | |
5609 | @end ifset | |
252b5132 RH |
5610 | @ifset M680X0 |
5611 | * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features | |
5612 | @end ifset | |
60bcf0fa NC |
5613 | @ifset M68HC11 |
5614 | * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features | |
5615 | @end ifset | |
81b0b3f1 BE |
5616 | @ifset M880X0 |
5617 | * M88K-Dependent:: M880x0 Dependent Features | |
5618 | @end ifset | |
252b5132 RH |
5619 | @ifset MIPS |
5620 | * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features | |
5621 | @end ifset | |
3c3bdf30 NC |
5622 | @ifset MMIX |
5623 | * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features | |
5624 | @end ifset | |
252b5132 RH |
5625 | @ifset SH |
5626 | * SH-Dependent:: Hitachi SH Dependent Features | |
5627 | @end ifset | |
e135f41b NC |
5628 | @ifset PDP11 |
5629 | * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features | |
5630 | @end ifset | |
041dd5a9 ILT |
5631 | @ifset PJ |
5632 | * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features | |
5633 | @end ifset | |
418c1742 MG |
5634 | @ifset PPC |
5635 | * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features | |
5636 | @end ifset | |
252b5132 RH |
5637 | @ifset SPARC |
5638 | * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features | |
5639 | @end ifset | |
39bec121 TW |
5640 | @ifset TIC54X |
5641 | * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features | |
5642 | @end ifset | |
252b5132 RH |
5643 | @ifset V850 |
5644 | * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features | |
5645 | @end ifset | |
5646 | @ifset Z8000 | |
5647 | * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features | |
5648 | @end ifset | |
5649 | @ifset VAX | |
5650 | * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features | |
5651 | @end ifset | |
5652 | @end menu | |
5653 | ||
5654 | @lowersections | |
5655 | @end ifset | |
5656 | ||
5657 | @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters* | |
5658 | @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a | |
5659 | @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called | |
5660 | @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each | |
5661 | @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of | |
5662 | @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH | |
5663 | @c in both conditional blocks. | |
5664 | ||
5665 | @ifset ARC | |
0d2bcfaf | 5666 | @include c-arc.texi |
252b5132 RH |
5667 | @end ifset |
5668 | ||
5669 | @ifset A29K | |
5670 | @include c-a29k.texi | |
5671 | @end ifset | |
5672 | ||
5673 | @ifset ARM | |
5674 | @include c-arm.texi | |
5675 | @end ifset | |
5676 | ||
5677 | @ifset Hitachi-all | |
5678 | @ifclear GENERIC | |
5679 | @node Machine Dependencies | |
5680 | @chapter Machine Dependent Features | |
5681 | ||
5682 | The machine instruction sets are different on each Hitachi chip family, | |
5683 | and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This | |
a4fb0134 | 5684 | chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each |
252b5132 RH |
5685 | family. |
5686 | ||
5687 | @menu | |
5688 | * H8/300-Dependent:: Hitachi H8/300 Dependent Features | |
5689 | * H8/500-Dependent:: Hitachi H8/500 Dependent Features | |
5690 | * SH-Dependent:: Hitachi SH Dependent Features | |
5691 | @end menu | |
5692 | @lowersections | |
5693 | @end ifclear | |
5694 | @end ifset | |
5695 | ||
5696 | @ifset D10V | |
5697 | @include c-d10v.texi | |
5698 | @end ifset | |
5699 | ||
5700 | @ifset D30V | |
5701 | @include c-d30v.texi | |
5702 | @end ifset | |
5703 | ||
5704 | @ifset H8/300 | |
5705 | @include c-h8300.texi | |
5706 | @end ifset | |
5707 | ||
5708 | @ifset H8/500 | |
5709 | @include c-h8500.texi | |
5710 | @end ifset | |
5711 | ||
5712 | @ifset HPPA | |
5713 | @include c-hppa.texi | |
5714 | @end ifset | |
5715 | ||
5b93d8bb AM |
5716 | @ifset I370 |
5717 | @include c-i370.texi | |
5718 | @end ifset | |
5719 | ||
252b5132 RH |
5720 | @ifset I80386 |
5721 | @include c-i386.texi | |
5722 | @end ifset | |
5723 | ||
e3308d0d JE |
5724 | @ifset I860 |
5725 | @include c-i860.texi | |
5726 | @end ifset | |
5727 | ||
252b5132 RH |
5728 | @ifset I960 |
5729 | @include c-i960.texi | |
5730 | @end ifset | |
5731 | ||
ec694b89 NC |
5732 | @ifset M32R |
5733 | @include c-m32r.texi | |
5734 | @end ifset | |
252b5132 RH |
5735 | |
5736 | @ifset M680X0 | |
5737 | @include c-m68k.texi | |
5738 | @end ifset | |
5739 | ||
60bcf0fa NC |
5740 | @ifset M68HC11 |
5741 | @include c-m68hc11.texi | |
5742 | @end ifset | |
5743 | ||
81b0b3f1 BE |
5744 | @ifset M880X0 |
5745 | @include c-m88k.texi | |
5746 | @end ifset | |
5747 | ||
252b5132 RH |
5748 | @ifset MIPS |
5749 | @include c-mips.texi | |
5750 | @end ifset | |
5751 | ||
3c3bdf30 NC |
5752 | @ifset MMIX |
5753 | @include c-mmix.texi | |
5754 | @end ifset | |
5755 | ||
252b5132 RH |
5756 | @ifset NS32K |
5757 | @include c-ns32k.texi | |
5758 | @end ifset | |
5759 | ||
e135f41b NC |
5760 | @ifset PDP11 |
5761 | @include c-pdp11.texi | |
5762 | @end ifset | |
5763 | ||
041dd5a9 ILT |
5764 | @ifset PJ |
5765 | @include c-pj.texi | |
5766 | @end ifset | |
5767 | ||
418c1742 MG |
5768 | @ifset PPC |
5769 | @include c-ppc.texi | |
5770 | @end ifset | |
5771 | ||
252b5132 RH |
5772 | @ifset SH |
5773 | @include c-sh.texi | |
5774 | @end ifset | |
5775 | ||
5776 | @ifset SPARC | |
5777 | @include c-sparc.texi | |
5778 | @end ifset | |
5779 | ||
39bec121 TW |
5780 | @ifset TIC54X |
5781 | @include c-tic54x.texi | |
5782 | @end ifset | |
5783 | ||
252b5132 RH |
5784 | @ifset Z8000 |
5785 | @include c-z8k.texi | |
5786 | @end ifset | |
5787 | ||
5788 | @ifset VAX | |
5789 | @include c-vax.texi | |
5790 | @end ifset | |
5791 | ||
5792 | @ifset V850 | |
5793 | @include c-v850.texi | |
5794 | @end ifset | |
5795 | ||
5796 | @ifset GENERIC | |
5797 | @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter | |
5798 | @raisesections | |
5799 | @end ifset | |
5800 | ||
5801 | @node Reporting Bugs | |
5802 | @chapter Reporting Bugs | |
5803 | @cindex bugs in assembler | |
5804 | @cindex reporting bugs in assembler | |
5805 | ||
a4fb0134 | 5806 | Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable. |
252b5132 RH |
5807 | |
5808 | Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may | |
5809 | not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the | |
a4fb0134 SC |
5810 | entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better. |
5811 | Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}. | |
252b5132 RH |
5812 | |
5813 | In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the | |
5814 | information that enables us to fix the bug. | |
5815 | ||
5816 | @menu | |
5817 | * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug? | |
5818 | * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs | |
5819 | @end menu | |
5820 | ||
5821 | @node Bug Criteria | |
5822 | @section Have you found a bug? | |
5823 | @cindex bug criteria | |
5824 | ||
5825 | If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines: | |
5826 | ||
5827 | @itemize @bullet | |
5828 | @cindex fatal signal | |
5829 | @cindex assembler crash | |
5830 | @cindex crash of assembler | |
5831 | @item | |
5832 | If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a | |
a4fb0134 | 5833 | @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash. |
252b5132 RH |
5834 | |
5835 | @cindex error on valid input | |
5836 | @item | |
a4fb0134 | 5837 | If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug. |
252b5132 RH |
5838 | |
5839 | @cindex invalid input | |
5840 | @item | |
a4fb0134 | 5841 | If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that |
252b5132 RH |
5842 | is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might |
5843 | be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''. | |
5844 | ||
5845 | @item | |
5846 | If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement | |
a4fb0134 | 5847 | of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case. |
252b5132 RH |
5848 | @end itemize |
5849 | ||
5850 | @node Bug Reporting | |
5851 | @section How to report bugs | |
5852 | @cindex bug reports | |
5853 | @cindex assembler bugs, reporting | |
5854 | ||
5855 | A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If | |
a4fb0134 | 5856 | you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you |
252b5132 RH |
5857 | contact that organization first. |
5858 | ||
5859 | You can find contact information for many support companies and | |
5860 | individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs | |
5861 | distribution. | |
5862 | ||
a4fb0134 | 5863 | In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}} |
46a04e3a | 5864 | to @samp{bug-binutils@@gnu.org}. |
252b5132 RH |
5865 | |
5866 | The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this: | |
5867 | @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a | |
5868 | fact or leave it out, state it! | |
5869 | ||
5870 | Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem | |
5871 | and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the | |
5872 | name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does | |
5873 | not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which | |
5874 | happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory; | |
5875 | perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool | |
5876 | the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and | |
5877 | give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do, | |
5878 | and the most helpful. | |
5879 | ||
5880 | Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if | |
5881 | it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption | |
5882 | that the bug has not been reported previously. | |
5883 | ||
5884 | Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a | |
5885 | bell?'' Those bug reports are useless, and we urge everyone to | |
5886 | @emph{refuse to respond to them} except to chide the sender to report | |
5887 | bugs properly. | |
5888 | ||
5889 | To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things: | |
5890 | ||
5891 | @itemize @bullet | |
5892 | @item | |
a4fb0134 | 5893 | The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start |
252b5132 RH |
5894 | it with the @samp{--version} argument. |
5895 | ||
5896 | Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for | |
a4fb0134 | 5897 | the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}. |
252b5132 RH |
5898 | |
5899 | @item | |
a4fb0134 | 5900 | Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source. |
252b5132 RH |
5901 | |
5902 | @item | |
5903 | The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and | |
5904 | version number. | |
5905 | ||
5906 | @item | |
a4fb0134 | 5907 | What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g. |
252b5132 RH |
5908 | ``@code{gcc-2.7}''. |
5909 | ||
5910 | @item | |
5911 | The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and | |
5912 | observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them | |
5913 | all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient. | |
5914 | ||
5915 | If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong | |
5916 | and then we might not encounter the bug. | |
5917 | ||
5918 | @item | |
5919 | A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when | |
5920 | the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the | |
5921 | high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source | |
5922 | when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use | |
5923 | the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a | |
5924 | file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how | |
a4fb0134 | 5925 | @command{@value{AS}} is being run. |
252b5132 RH |
5926 | |
5927 | @item | |
5928 | A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is | |
5929 | incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.'' | |
5930 | ||
a4fb0134 | 5931 | Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we |
252b5132 RH |
5932 | will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not |
5933 | notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to | |
5934 | make a mistake. | |
5935 | ||
5936 | Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so | |
5937 | explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of | |
a4fb0134 | 5938 | @command{@value{AS}} is out of synch, or you have encountered a bug in the C |
252b5132 RH |
5939 | library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours |
5940 | would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we | |
5941 | would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to | |
5942 | expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our | |
5943 | observations. | |
5944 | ||
5945 | @item | |
a4fb0134 | 5946 | If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context |
252b5132 RH |
5947 | diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p} |
5948 | option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even | |
a4fb0134 | 5949 | discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not |
252b5132 RH |
5950 | by line number. |
5951 | ||
5952 | The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your | |
5953 | sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us. | |
5954 | @end itemize | |
5955 | ||
5956 | Here are some things that are not necessary: | |
5957 | ||
5958 | @itemize @bullet | |
5959 | @item | |
5960 | A description of the envelope of the bug. | |
5961 | ||
5962 | Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating | |
5963 | which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which | |
5964 | changes will not affect it. | |
5965 | ||
5966 | This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we | |
5967 | will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger | |
5968 | with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples. | |
5969 | We recommend that you save your time for something else. | |
5970 | ||
5971 | Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead} | |
5972 | of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the | |
5973 | output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take | |
5974 | less time, and so on. | |
5975 | ||
5976 | However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this, | |
5977 | report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used. | |
5978 | ||
5979 | @item | |
5980 | A patch for the bug. | |
5981 | ||
5982 | A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit | |
5983 | the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that | |
5984 | a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide | |
5985 | to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all. | |
5986 | ||
a4fb0134 | 5987 | Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to |
252b5132 RH |
5988 | construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through |
5989 | the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct | |
5990 | one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed. | |
5991 | ||
5992 | And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your | |
5993 | patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will | |
5994 | help us to understand. | |
5995 | ||
5996 | @item | |
5997 | A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on. | |
5998 | ||
5999 | Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such | |
6000 | things without first using the debugger to find the facts. | |
6001 | @end itemize | |
6002 | ||
6003 | @node Acknowledgements | |
6004 | @chapter Acknowledgements | |
6005 | ||
a4fb0134 | 6006 | If you have contributed to @command{@value{AS}} and your name isn't listed here, |
252b5132 RH |
6007 | it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the |
6008 | maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently | |
6009 | @c (January 1994), | |
6010 | the maintainer is Ken Raeburn (email address @code{raeburn@@cygnus.com}). | |
6011 | ||
6012 | Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any | |
6013 | more details?} | |
6014 | ||
6015 | Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug | |
6016 | information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and | |
6017 | extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}. | |
6018 | ||
6019 | K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and | |
6020 | many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS | |
6021 | up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite, | |
6022 | testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration | |
6023 | including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits | |
6024 | and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added | |
6025 | support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF | |
6026 | port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode | |
6027 | file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know'' | |
6028 | assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint. | |
6029 | ||
6030 | Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code | |
6031 | in format-specific I/O modules. | |
6032 | ||
6033 | The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale | |
6034 | has done much work with it since. | |
6035 | ||
6036 | The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus. | |
6037 | ||
6038 | Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support. | |
6039 | ||
6040 | The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo | |
6041 | University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science. | |
6042 | ||
6043 | Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end | |
6044 | (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support | |
6045 | (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to | |
6046 | support a.out format. | |
6047 | ||
6048 | Support for the Zilog Z8k and Hitachi H8/300 and H8/500 processors (tc-z8k, | |
6049 | tc-h8300, tc-h8500), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by | |
6050 | Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to | |
6051 | use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k | |
6052 | targets. | |
6053 | ||
6054 | John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and | |
6055 | simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He | |
6056 | updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced | |
6057 | fixed-size instructions (e.g. @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions | |
6058 | remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested | |
6059 | cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and | |
6060 | required the proverbial one-bit fix. | |
6061 | ||
6062 | Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the | |
6063 | 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix), | |
6064 | added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and | |
6065 | PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches. | |
6066 | ||
a4fb0134 | 6067 | Steve Chamberlain made @command{@value{AS}} able to generate listings. |
252b5132 RH |
6068 | |
6069 | Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300. | |
6070 | ||
6071 | Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM) | |
6072 | along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object | |
6073 | formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at | |
6074 | the University of Utah and Cygnus Support. | |
6075 | ||
6076 | Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus | |
6077 | Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and | |
6078 | Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open | |
6079 | Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc, | |
6080 | and some initial 64-bit support). | |
6081 | ||
5b93d8bb AM |
6082 | Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 "IBM 370" architecture. |
6083 | ||
252b5132 RH |
6084 | Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD |
6085 | support for openVMS/Alpha. | |
6086 | ||
39bec121 TW |
6087 | Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic* |
6088 | flavors. | |
6089 | ||
252b5132 RH |
6090 | Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and |
6091 | configuration enhancements. | |
6092 | ||
6093 | Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If | |
6094 | you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and | |
6095 | want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not | |
6096 | intentionally leaving anyone out. | |
6097 | ||
cf055d54 NC |
6098 | @node GNU Free Documentation License |
6099 | @chapter GNU Free Documentation License | |
6100 | ||
6101 | GNU Free Documentation License | |
6102 | ||
6103 | Version 1.1, March 2000 | |
6104 | ||
6105 | Copyright (C) 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | |
6106 | 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA | |
6107 | ||
6108 | Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies | |
6109 | of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. | |
6110 | ||
6111 | ||
6112 | 0. PREAMBLE | |
6113 | ||
6114 | The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other | |
6115 | written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone | |
6116 | the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without | |
6117 | modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, | |
6118 | this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get | |
6119 | credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for | |
6120 | modifications made by others. | |
6121 | ||
6122 | This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative | |
6123 | works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It | |
6124 | complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft | |
6125 | license designed for free software. | |
6126 | ||
6127 | We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free | |
6128 | software, because free software needs free documentation: a free | |
6129 | program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the | |
6130 | software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; | |
6131 | it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or | |
6132 | whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License | |
6133 | principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. | |
6134 | ||
6135 | ||
6136 | 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS | |
6137 | ||
6138 | This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a | |
6139 | notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed | |
6140 | under the terms of this License. The "Document", below, refers to any | |
6141 | such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is | |
6142 | addressed as "you". | |
6143 | ||
6144 | A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the | |
6145 | Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with | |
6146 | modifications and/or translated into another language. | |
6147 | ||
6148 | A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section of | |
6149 | the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the | |
6150 | publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject | |
6151 | (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly | |
6152 | within that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a | |
6153 | textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any | |
6154 | mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical | |
6155 | connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, | |
6156 | commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding | |
6157 | them. | |
6158 | ||
6159 | The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose titles | |
6160 | are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice | |
6161 | that says that the Document is released under this License. | |
6162 | ||
6163 | The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are listed, | |
6164 | as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that | |
6165 | the Document is released under this License. | |
6166 | ||
6167 | A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, | |
6168 | represented in a format whose specification is available to the | |
6169 | general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and | |
6170 | straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of | |
6171 | pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available | |
6172 | drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or | |
6173 | for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input | |
6174 | to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file | |
6175 | format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage | |
6176 | subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is | |
6177 | not "Transparent" is called "Opaque". | |
6178 | ||
6179 | Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain | |
6180 | ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML | |
6181 | or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple | |
6182 | HTML designed for human modification. Opaque formats include | |
6183 | PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only | |
6184 | by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or | |
6185 | processing tools are not generally available, and the | |
6186 | machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output | |
6187 | purposes only. | |
6188 | ||
6189 | The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself, | |
6190 | plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material | |
6191 | this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in | |
6192 | formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title Page" means | |
6193 | the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, | |
6194 | preceding the beginning of the body of the text. | |
6195 | ||
6196 | ||
6197 | 2. VERBATIM COPYING | |
6198 | ||
6199 | You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either | |
6200 | commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the | |
6201 | copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies | |
6202 | to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other | |
6203 | conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use | |
6204 | technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further | |
6205 | copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept | |
6206 | compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough | |
6207 | number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3. | |
6208 | ||
6209 | You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and | |
6210 | you may publicly display copies. | |
6211 | ||
6212 | ||
6213 | 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY | |
6214 | ||
6215 | If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than 100, | |
6216 | and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose | |
6217 | the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover | |
6218 | Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on | |
6219 | the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify | |
6220 | you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present | |
6221 | the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and | |
6222 | visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. | |
6223 | Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve | |
6224 | the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated | |
6225 | as verbatim copying in other respects. | |
6226 | ||
6227 | If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit | |
6228 | legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit | |
6229 | reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent | |
6230 | pages. | |
6231 | ||
6232 | If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering | |
6233 | more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent | |
6234 | copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy | |
6235 | a publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete | |
6236 | Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which the | |
6237 | general network-using public has access to download anonymously at no | |
6238 | charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the latter | |
6239 | option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin | |
6240 | distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this | |
6241 | Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location | |
6242 | until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque | |
6243 | copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to | |
6244 | the public. | |
6245 | ||
6246 | It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the | |
6247 | Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give | |
6248 | them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document. | |
6249 | ||
6250 | ||
6251 | 4. MODIFICATIONS | |
6252 | ||
6253 | You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under | |
6254 | the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release | |
6255 | the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified | |
6256 | Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution | |
6257 | and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy | |
6258 | of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version: | |
6259 | ||
6260 | A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct | |
6261 | from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions | |
6262 | (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section | |
6263 | of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version | |
6264 | if the original publisher of that version gives permission. | |
6265 | B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities | |
6266 | responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified | |
6267 | Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the | |
6268 | Document (all of its principal authors, if it has less than five). | |
6269 | C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the | |
6270 | Modified Version, as the publisher. | |
6271 | D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. | |
6272 | E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications | |
6273 | adjacent to the other copyright notices. | |
6274 | F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice | |
6275 | giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the | |
6276 | terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. | |
6277 | G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections | |
6278 | and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice. | |
6279 | H. Include an unaltered copy of this License. | |
6280 | I. Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add to | |
6281 | it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and | |
6282 | publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If | |
6283 | there is no section entitled "History" in the Document, create one | |
6284 | stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as | |
6285 | given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified | |
6286 | Version as stated in the previous sentence. | |
6287 | J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for | |
6288 | public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise | |
6289 | the network locations given in the Document for previous versions | |
6290 | it was based on. These may be placed in the "History" section. | |
6291 | You may omit a network location for a work that was published at | |
6292 | least four years before the Document itself, or if the original | |
6293 | publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. | |
6294 | K. In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications", | |
6295 | preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the | |
6296 | substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements | |
6297 | and/or dedications given therein. | |
6298 | L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, | |
6299 | unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers | |
6300 | or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. | |
6301 | M. Delete any section entitled "Endorsements". Such a section | |
6302 | may not be included in the Modified Version. | |
6303 | N. Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements" | |
6304 | or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section. | |
6305 | ||
6306 | If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or | |
6307 | appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material | |
6308 | copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all | |
6309 | of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the | |
6310 | list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. | |
6311 | These titles must be distinct from any other section titles. | |
6312 | ||
6313 | You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains | |
6314 | nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various | |
6315 | parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has | |
6316 | been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a | |
6317 | standard. | |
6318 | ||
6319 | You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a | |
6320 | passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list | |
6321 | of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of | |
6322 | Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or | |
6323 | through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already | |
6324 | includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or | |
6325 | by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, | |
6326 | you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit | |
6327 | permission from the previous publisher that added the old one. | |
6328 | ||
6329 | The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License | |
6330 | give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or | |
6331 | imply endorsement of any Modified Version. | |
6332 | ||
6333 | ||
6334 | 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS | |
6335 | ||
6336 | You may combine the Document with other documents released under this | |
6337 | License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified | |
6338 | versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the | |
6339 | Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and | |
6340 | list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its | |
6341 | license notice. | |
6342 | ||
6343 | The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and | |
6344 | multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single | |
6345 | copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but | |
6346 | different contents, make the title of each such section unique by | |
6347 | adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original | |
6348 | author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. | |
6349 | Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of | |
6350 | Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work. | |
6351 | ||
6352 | In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled "History" | |
6353 | in the various original documents, forming one section entitled | |
6354 | "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled "Acknowledgements", | |
6355 | and any sections entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections | |
6356 | entitled "Endorsements." | |
6357 | ||
6358 | ||
6359 | 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS | |
6360 | ||
6361 | You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents | |
6362 | released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this | |
6363 | License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in | |
6364 | the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for | |
6365 | verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. | |
6366 | ||
6367 | You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute | |
6368 | it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this | |
6369 | License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all | |
6370 | other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document. | |
6371 | ||
6372 | ||
6373 | 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS | |
6374 | ||
6375 | A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate | |
6376 | and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or | |
6377 | distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a Modified Version | |
6378 | of the Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the | |
6379 | compilation. Such a compilation is called an "aggregate", and this | |
6380 | License does not apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled | |
6381 | with the Document, on account of their being thus compiled, if they | |
6382 | are not themselves derivative works of the Document. | |
6383 | ||
6384 | If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these | |
6385 | copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter | |
6386 | of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on | |
6387 | covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. | |
6388 | Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate. | |
6389 | ||
6390 | ||
6391 | 8. TRANSLATION | |
6392 | ||
6393 | Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may | |
6394 | distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. | |
6395 | Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special | |
6396 | permission from their copyright holders, but you may include | |
6397 | translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the | |
6398 | original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a | |
6399 | translation of this License provided that you also include the | |
6400 | original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement | |
6401 | between the translation and the original English version of this | |
6402 | License, the original English version will prevail. | |
6403 | ||
6404 | ||
6405 | 9. TERMINATION | |
6406 | ||
6407 | You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except | |
6408 | as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to | |
6409 | copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will | |
6410 | automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, | |
6411 | parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this | |
6412 | License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such | |
6413 | parties remain in full compliance. | |
6414 | ||
6415 | ||
6416 | 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE | |
6417 | ||
6418 | The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions | |
6419 | of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new | |
6420 | versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may | |
6421 | differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See | |
6422 | http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. | |
6423 | ||
6424 | Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. | |
6425 | If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this | |
6426 | License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of | |
6427 | following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or | |
6428 | of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the | |
6429 | Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version | |
6430 | number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not | |
6431 | as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. | |
6432 | ||
6433 | ||
6434 | ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents | |
6435 | ||
6436 | To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of | |
6437 | the License in the document and put the following copyright and | |
6438 | license notices just after the title page: | |
6439 | ||
6440 | @smallexample | |
6441 | Copyright (c) YEAR YOUR NAME. | |
6442 | Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document | |
6443 | under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 | |
6444 | or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; | |
6445 | with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the | |
6446 | Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST. | |
6447 | A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU | |
6448 | Free Documentation License". | |
6449 | @end smallexample | |
6450 | ||
6451 | If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections" | |
6452 | instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no | |
6453 | Front-Cover Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of | |
6454 | "Front-Cover Texts being LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts. | |
6455 | ||
6456 | If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we | |
6457 | recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of | |
6458 | free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, | |
6459 | to permit their use in free software. | |
6460 | ||
252b5132 RH |
6461 | @node Index |
6462 | @unnumbered Index | |
6463 | ||
6464 | @printindex cp | |
6465 | ||
6466 | @contents | |
6467 | @bye | |
6468 | @c Local Variables: | |
6469 | @c fill-column: 79 | |
6470 | @c End: |